P. 1
Master Cam Design Help Topics

Master Cam Design Help Topics

|Views: 98|Likes:
Publicado pormsviperms

More info:

Published by: msviperms on Jun 23, 2011
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

07/22/2012

pdf

text

original

Sections

  • Entering Points
  • Modify functions
  • Offsetting surfaces
  • Trimming surfaces to a plane
  • Trimming surfaces to surfaces
  • Creating a trimmed surface within a flat boundary
  • Translating entities
  • Drafting menu options
  • Creating dimensions in SmartMode (Drafting menu)
  • Modifying Solids
  • Creating cuts on a solids

MASTER CAM DESIGN

ENTERING DATA
When Mastercam prompts for data entry such as a value for height, width, radius, or angle, you can take one of the following actions. These actions apply to both the prompt area and dialog box fields. ¨ ¨ ¨ Notes: ¨ Mastercam remembers the previous XYZ coordinates that you entered. To use these values again, press [Enter] instead of entering a value for each of the coordinates. ¨ Mastercam accepts formulas as well as numbers. You can use addition [+], subtraction [-], multiplication [*], division [/], and parentheses [( )]. Use ordinary algebraic notation [i.e., x1+2/3y(16*.025)/8z-1/2]. ¨ Wherever Mastercam accepts real numbers and formulas, you can enter an angle value in degrees/minutes/seconds or gradians/radians formats. Use the following data entry tokens, always placing the token after the numeral: degrees=d minutes = ‘ seconds = " gradians = g radians = r ¨ When prompted for a real value (a length, a distance, or an angle) at the prompt line, you can use the up and down arrow keys to display previously entered values. Press either mouse button or press [Enter] to accept the displayed value. Type the data directly into the text box, then press [Enter]. Type the letter of a shortcut method, then press [Enter].

Data entry shortcuts
Data entry shortcuts let you enter data that you gather from the graphics area into the prompt area or any text box that asks for a real (or decimal) number. To use a data entry shortcut, enter the letter of the shortcut method, then click the point that you want in the graphics window. The shortcuts appear next to the prompt area as shown below. Clicking right in a text box displays a quick reference of the shortcuts and their meanings.

X X coordinate value for a selected point. Press [X] then choose the point whose X coordinate you want to use. 1

Y Y coordinate value for a selected point. Press [Y] then choose the point whose Y coordinate you want to use. Z Z coordinate value for a selected point. Press [Z] then choose the point whose Z coordinate you want to use. R Radius of a selected arc. Press [R] then select the arc whose radius you want to use, or select a radius dimension. D Diameter of a selected arc. Press [D] then select the arc whose diameter you want to use, or select a diameter dimension. L Length of a line, arc, or spline. Press [L] then select the entity whose length you want to use. Other methods for entering a length: select a linear format dimension, a witness line, or the distance between two witness lines; select text to enter text height as a length measurement. S Distance between two points. Press [S] then select the two points. A Angle. Displays the Angle menu which provides options for defining an angle value. ? Displays the quick reference to the data entry shortcuts. In a text box that accepts a real (decimal) number, right-click to display the quick reference. Defining angle values for data entry 1 Line Uses the angle of a single line that you select. Mastercam calculates the angle in a counterclockwise direction from the horizontal line of the current Cplane. 1 line also lets you select an angular dimension to obtain an angle value. 2 Lines Uses the angle formed by two lines that you select. Mastercam calculates the angle in a counterclockwise direction from the first selected line to the second selected line. P ts ( 2 or 3 ) Enter two or three points to determine an angle. Enter two points, then press [Esc] to calculate the angle of the line that runs between the two points in a counterclockwise direction from the horizontal axis of the current Cplane. When entering three points, the first point becomes the pivot point (equivalent to an arc center), and the next two points define an angular distance. Arc sweep An arc sweep is the distance in degrees from the start angle to its end angle. The system prompts you to select the arc whose sweep angle you want to use. Value Lets you type a value for an angle. Values are in decimal degrees by default, but can be entered in degree/minute/seconds format or gradians/radians format. Use the following data entry tokens, always placing the token after the numeral: degrees=d minutes = ‘ seconds = " gradians = g radians = r Examples: 25d11’5" 25g 200r

2

POINT ENTRY Entering Points
Throughout your work in Mastercam the system prompts you to enter points. By entering points you define positions in 3D space. You can enter points using one of two methods: Mastercam's AutoCursor™ feature or the Point Entry menu. When you enter a point, Mastercam projects the selected position onto the current construction plane. If the current Cplane is set to 3D, Mastercam uses the actual position of the selected point. About Auto Cursor The AutoCursor™ is a point entry feature that is available whenever Mastercam displays the Point Entry menu and prompts you to enter a point. AutoCursor eliminates menu steps by detecting and snapping to points as you move the cursor over geometry on the screen. Endpoints and midpoints of curves, lines, arc center points, and point entities are all detected and highlighted by AutoCursor. If AutoCursor doesn’t detect any points, the AutoCursor defaults to the Sketch Point Entry menu option, letting you enter a point at any position. At any time while AutoCursor is active, you can override the auto-selected point by using the mouse or keyboard shortcut keys to access Point Entry menu options. In complex geometry there may be more than one point that lies within the detection range of the cursor. In these cases, the AutoCursor uses the order shown below to detect and snap to points. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Point entities Endpoints of curves or lines Midpoints of curves or lines Quadrant points of arcs Centers of arcs Real curve or line intersections (not intersections projected by Mastercam) Points on the active selection grid

Note: AutoCursor does not recognize endpoints on surfaces. To enter a point at the endpoint of a surface, you must use the Endpoints option on the Point Entry menu. AutoCursor is active by default. To disable AutoCursor, choose Main Menu, Screen, Config, select the Screen tab, and clear the Use AutoCursor in Point Selection checkbox. Turning AutoCursor on or off 1. 2. 3. Right-click in the graphics window to display the menu. Choose AutoCursor. A check appears next to the AutoCursor menu selection when it is on. Right click and choose AutoCursor to turn it off. 3

Note: You can also choose Screen, Next menu, and toggle AutoCursor to Y. Entering a point using AutoCursor 1. Activate AutoCursor from the right-click menu.

2. Move the cursor over geometry on the screen. As Mastercam detects and snaps to points, it displays a temporary open-square over the point and highlights the corresponding Point Entry menu option. 3. When the cursor snaps to the point you want, left-click to enter the point.

Entering a point using XYZ coordinates You can enter a point using XYZ coordinates as an alternative to selecting a point with the cursor or using AutoCursor™. Mastercam accepts coordinates that use commas as separators (5,3,1) or that use the letter of the coordinate (x5y3z1). If you enter values for just one or two coordinates (x1 or x1y2), Mastercam uses the coordinate values of the last point you entered for any axes you omitted. If you are entering a point for the first time in the current Mastercam session, the system uses zero as the default value for any coordinates that you do not enter. 1. Once in the Point Entry menu, type the coordinate in either format described above. As soon as you begin typing, the prompt area opens a data entry field. 2. Press [Enter] to enter a point at the coordinate

Entering a point at the system origin Choosing Origin from the Point Entry menu places a point at the system origin. Mastercam places a point or sets a point position at the construction origin. System origin In the Cartesian coordinate system, the intersection of the X, Y, and Z axes (0,0,0) is known as the system origin. Often the system origin corresponds with the lower left corner of the part or the stock to be machined. The origin may also correspond with the 0,0,0 position on the milling machine, which is a known reference point for all machine moves. The system origin is fixed and cannot be changed. In Mastercam, the graphics view axes markers (also called the viewport axes markers) always refer to the system coordinates, which use 0,0,0 as the origin. The system coordinates are also referred to as world coordinates. You can view the system origin on screen by pressing [F9]. The system origin is shown in brown (default color). Construction origin The current Cplane has an origin, called the construction origin. In a new MC9 file, both the system and construction origins are set to 0,0,0. You set a new construction origin by pressing [Alt+ O] when in the Cplane menu and entering a coordinate or selecting a point in the graphics window. The construction origin remains set at the point that you choose until you change it, even when you change the Cplane (with one exception – when you retrieve a named view as described below). You can view the construction origin on screen by pressing [F9]. The construction origin is shown in green (default color).

4

An advantage of the construction origin is that it simplifies creating or translating geometry. Setting a construction origin relative to the current Cplane lets you think about XYZ coordinates with respect to the current Cplane only, not the system origin. This benefit becomes apparent when working on a large part where the system origin may not be visible in the graphics window. You can set the construction origin to be located near the area on the part where you are working and avoid the complication of calculating coordinates in reference to an origin that may not be on screen. You can save user-defined Cplanes as named views. An advantage of using named views is that you can associate an origin to a plane. When you change the Cplane to a named view, the construction origin changes to the origin linked to the view. For more information, see Creating a named view. Note: You can set the colors of the system and construction origins on the Screen tab of the System Configuration dialog box (Screen, Config, Screen tab, System colors). Entering a point at the center of an arc 1. 2. Choose Center from the Point Entry menu. Select an arc. Mastercam highlights the point at center of the arc.

Entering a point at the endpoint of an entity 1. 2. Notes: ¨ When selecting a surface entity, Mastercam enters a point at the closest corner. Choose Endpoint from the Point Entry menu. Select an entity. Mastercam highlights the entity’s endpoint.

¨ When selecting a trimmed surface, Mastercam calculates the surface edges of the base surface, not the trimmed surface. Therefore, the point may be created outside of the trimmed surface. Entering a point at the intersection of two curves The Intersec option lets you enter a point at the intersection of two curves (lines, arcs, or splines) in the current construction plane. Since two curves may intersect at multiple positions, be sure to select each curve near the intersection where you want to enter a point. When lines or arcs do not intersect, Mastercam calculates an extension to one or both entities and places a point where the entities could intersect. However, Mastercam cannot calculate a predictable extension to a spline. Intersec only works with a spline that could be intersected by a line or arc. 1. Choose Intersec from the Point Entry menu.

2. Choose the first curve, then choose a second curve that intersects the first. Mastercam highlights the intersection point. Entering a point at the midpoint of a curve This option lets you enter a point at the midpoint of a curve (line, arc, or spline). A midpoint is the point calculated halfway along the length of a curve.

5

6 . 1. then left-click to highlight the point at that position. Mastercam highlights the point previously entered. or spline. Entering a point relative to the position of another point The Relative option lets you choose a point based on another point’s position. Choose Quadrant from the Point Entry menu. then press the left mouse button. 90. choose Polar. The Point Entry: Relative menu displays. 2. Choose Relative from the Point Entry menu. arc. choose Rectang from the menu. Move the cursor to a location on the screen where you want to enter a point. Mastercam highlights the selected point. You can use the selection gridto enter points more precisely. The point is entered at the location where the cursor projects onto the Cplane. 2. Choose Sketch from the Point Entry menu. Type a value for angle. Mastercam highlights the midpoint of the selected curve. Select a point. To enter a distance using polar coordinates. 1. then press [Enter] to define the point. Enter a point. Entering a point at the position of an existing point 1. 2. Mastercam highlights the closest quadrant point. Choose Point from the Point Entry menu. 2. Entering a point at the last entered position From the Point Entry menu. Entering a point at a quadrant position on an arc 1. Type the coordinate in the prompt area. 180. using the cursor to pick a position in the graphics window. then press [Enter] to define the point. Select a line. To enter a distance using XYZ coordinates. Type a value for distance (vector length) and press [Enter]. Snapping to the selection grid provides a finer level of precision than sketching points freehand. choose Last. 3. Choose Midpoint from the Point Entry menu. or 270 degree quadrant point of the arc. Move the cursor close to the 0. 2.1. Setting up a grid for point entry The selection grid is a matrix of reference points that the cursor snaps to when you sketch a point. Sketching a point at any position The Sketch option lets you enter a point freehand.

the options in the Entity selection menu make selection easier and quicker than picking one entity at a time. and choose the selection grid button from the Screen tab. The auto-highlight feature can be turned on and off in the Screen tab of the System Configuration dialog or in the right-click menu. Mastercam displays the Entity Selection menu which provides several selection methods. Configure. Grid.When you press [Alt+G] or choose Screen. Follow the procedure above to set up a default selection grid. Check Active grid to turn on the selection grid. 2. Choose Test to view the grid settings before saving them. 3. choose Screen. To save the grid settings in the configuration file. deactivating. grid. Next menu. Enter a value (inches or millimetres) for Size to set the overall length and width of the grid (it can extend beyond the screen boundaries). 4. Sel. Note: Be sure to check both Active grid and Visible grid to view the activated grid. Choose OK to save the settings. Entity Selection Throughout your work in Mastercam the system prompts you to select entities. Sel. 9. Check Visible grid to make the selection grid visible. The selection methods available vary according to the function that you are using. or customizing the appearance of the selection grid. 7 . Enter a color number or choose the Color button to select the color for the grid points and origin marker. Next menu. Choose Main Menu. 6. The system highlights selected entities in white. When working with complex geometry. 5. When the cursor is very close to an entity. Enter values (inches or millimeters) in the Spacing X and Y fields for the distance between the grid points. 7. The Selection Grid dialog box opens. Screen. 8. The highlight color can be changed in the Screen tab of the System Configuration dialog box. Notes: ¨ The grid settings persist for the current MC9 file. the Selection Grid Parameters dialog box opens to give you options for activating. the entity highlights showing you what would be selected if you clicked at that position on the screen. Press [Esc] to return to the Selection Grid dialog box. The simplest way to select entities is to click the mouse in the graphics window when the Entity Selection menu displays. 1. Enter an Origin XY coordinate for center of the grid or choose Select and choose a point from the graphics window. When you have the option to select more than one entity. These values define the length and width of the grid cells.

Configure). When you finish selecting entities. ¨ To narrow the selection of entities to only one level of geometry at a time. For example you can chain together the entities for separate parts to be cut from the same workpiece in the same operation. For example. and toolpaths. 2. 3. However. press [Esc] to return to the Entity Selection menu. About chains Chaining activates entities in a specific order in preparation for a function such as toolpath or surface creation. Choose Unselect from the Entity Selection menu. use the Mask function and choose Attributes from the Selection Mask dialog box. Chaining is also used to define entities for several Analyze and Create functions and is an efficient method for entity selection even when a specific order is not required.Selection Tips The following tips can aid your selection of entities as you work in Mastercam: ¨ Rapid-fire selection: To select single entities quickly. Usually you chain the geometry that is used in a single operation. Most toolpaths require geometry to be chained. you can also chain together separate sets of entities to be cut in a single operation. ¨ ¨ To quickly simplify a crowded screen and narrow your selection of entities. surface. Unselecting entities 1. Entities from the Entity Selection menu. you chain the entities that form the shape that you want to be machined. when creating a contour toolpath. Chaining identifies the geometry that makes up the surface sections or boundaries. Many surface and solid creation methods require geometry to be chained. Chaining differs from other selection methods because it associates order and direction to the selected curves. Chaining order and direction affect the way Mastercam generates surfaces. Unchained entities won’t be included in the toolpath. such as a contour toolpath or pocket toolpath. or solid. you select one or more sets of curves (lines. When finished. When you chain geometry. 8 . hold down both mouse buttons and move the cursor over geometry that you want to select. choose All. release the mouse buttons. Click on highlighted entities to unselect them. use the Hide function. Chaining Chaining is the process of selecting and linking pieces of geometry so that they form the foundation of a toolpath. You can change the select color using the System Colors button in the Screen tab of the System Configuration dialog box (Screen. arcs. To select all entities for a single operation. and splines) or points which have adjoining endpoints. solids. Chaining also determines the direction of tool travel during machining. Mastercam highlights chains in the same color as selected entities.

Chaining direction All chains have a direction. The arrow in the following graphic shows the counterclockwise chaining direction for a closed chain. Direction for closed chains is either clockwise or counterclockwise. In an open chain the start and endpoints are different coordinates. while the direction for open chains points toward one of the chain endpoints. An open chain may consist of a single entity or several contiguous entities.Chains also have these characteristics: Type (open or closed) Direction Order Branch points Chains are open or closed. Mastercam uses chaining direction to synchronize the chains to create a smooth. 9 . Closed chains typically consist of several entities that have adjacent endpoints and that form a closed boundary. In surface creation. Examples of open chains are single lines or arcs. Errors in establishing chaining direction often result in a twisted surface that can’t be machined. Examples of closed chains are rectangles or circles. In a closed chain the start and endpoints share the same coordinates. regular surface. The chain starts at the base point of the arrow. The chaining direction determines the direction of tool movement in a toolpath.

Therefore. In a closed chain. In the graphic below. the start point is placed at the end of the chain closest to the selection point and the chain direction points to the opposite end of the chain. This chaining option is useful for geometry that consists of inside and outside shapes and provides an automated method of reversing the cutter offset from the inside shape to the outside shape. Reversing chaining direction for inner chains Use this chaining option to swap the chaining direction when chains are surrounded by an outer boundary. Closed chains are assigned either a clockwise or counterclockwise direction regardless of where you position the cursor when selecting the chain. In an open chain. When enabled. 10 . the cutter needs to be offset to the inside of the chain while the surrounding chain requires the cutter to be offset to the outside of the chain. check the box labeled Use cursor position for manual selection. the inside chains represent an opening which is cut out. leaving the inside chain as scrap.Mastercam determines chaining direction differently for open chains than closed chains. Mastercam assigns chain direction based on the Direction for Closed Chains parameters in the Chaining Options dialog box. this option sets chaining direction relative to the position of the cursor when you select an entity to be chained. For more control over the direction of closed chains.

Other functions that use chaining don’t require that the entities get chained in any particular order. and swept surfaces. In these cases. Examples of these functions are loft. The topics below describe the individual options. 11 . ruled. chaining is a selection method and order is irrelevant. The values you select in the Chaining options dialog box will be in effect whenever you create a chain in the current file. If you need to create a branch point at the intersection of two entities. You can see the current values in the prompt area whenever a chaining menu appears. order is important to ensure minimal rapid moves. Use either the Modify. A coons surface chaining. select the Options command in several of the chaining menus. Branch points indicate where there are different paths that the chain can take. and the Delete command. coons. Break command to divide the intersecting entities at a specific point. When chaining for toolpaths. Mastercam also uses branch points as a method for synchronizing chains. Examples of these functions include the Xform commands Rotate and Mirror. you need to break both entities at their intersection point. Chaining options Use the Chaining options dialog box to set default values for a number of choices that affect how you work with chains. To reach the Chaining options dialog box. When Mastercam encounters a branch point during chaining. Entities can intersect without having their endpoints meet. requires separate curves to define along and across edges. Mastercam only considers a position a branch point when multiple entity endpoints meet. The Chain Manager in the Operations Manager can then be used to re-order the chains. Branch points A branch point is the position where the endpoints of two or more entities meet. Trim or Modify. it prompts you to choose the path for the chain to follow.Chaining order Some Mastercam functions that require chaining produce unexpected results if the entities are chained in an order that prevents Mastercam from properly synchronizing the chains. You can check rapid moves with the Backplot function which represents rapid moves in yellow. You can set the synchronization method in the Chaining Options dialog box. for instance.

Choose Main Menu. Chaining tips ¨ Mastercam supports Auto-Partial chaining. Creating points The Point menu gives you options for creating point entities. Enter a point to create a point at that position. Create. use Last from the Chaining Methods menu. Create. or spline. ¨ To reselect the previous chained entities. Select a line. Configure function. 2. 3. Point. Creating entities The Create menu gives you options for creating geometric and drafting entities. Point. In the prompt area. ¨ If the chain stops unexpectedly. This eliminates the need to repeatedly choose Partial from the Chaining Methods menu when partial chaining. arc. see Setting default CAD values. Click on the topics below for more information. These are set by way of the Chaining options button on the Screen tab of the System Configuration dialog box (Screen. The functions on the Create menu can be divided into three categories: Note: For information on setting default design and drafting values. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Chain to check for overlapping entities. 12 . Repeat step 2 to create additional points. however. 2. Configure). Creating a point at any position in the graphics window 1.You can also set a number of system chaining defaults that will apply to all files. Choose Main Menu. 4. Create. Mastercam rechains the entities so that you can edit the chains and correct chaining direction or order. Point. Along ent. Last prevents you from having to completely rechain the entities. 3. You can then use Modify functions to trim adjacent entities together in order to chain them. Many of these values can be set during operation. enter the number of points to create along the entity. Position. You can access the Create menu by choosing Create from the Main Menu. You can access the Point menu by choosing Main Menu. use Analyze. for example when correcting a surface that didn’t generate properly. Creating points at fixed intervals along a curve 1. some are unique and can only be set prior to operation using the Screen.

2. Create. Dynamic. 4. Choose Main Menu. Creating points at the control points of a NURBS spline 1. Choose Main Menu. 2. Creating points at the node points of a parametric spline 1.Note: The default value is an approximation based on the entity length divided by . then left-click. 4. Create. Point. move the cursor crosshairs over the point. 3. Move the base of the arrow to a desired position. Creating a point at any position on a solid face 1. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create points along additional entities. spline. 2. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the selected entity. Create. Select a parametric spline. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Choose Main Menu. or surface. Dynamic. Choose Main Menu. or press [Esc] twice to exit the function. Cpts NURBS. 4. Select a NURBS spline.1 inches for English units and 2. Creating a point at any position on a curve or surface 1. Node pts. then select a solid face. Choose Solid face. 5. 4. arc. 13 . 3. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Note: To create the point at the position of an existing point entity. Set Faces to Y. 5. Repeat step 2 to create points for additional parametric splines. Repeat step 3 to create additional points on the same entity. Create.0 mm for metric units. Select a line. Point. Point. 2. Press [Esc] to exit the function. then left-click to create a point at that position. 3. 3. Press [Esc] and repeat steps 2 and 3 to create points on a different entity. type [S] to activate snapping. Repeat step 2 to create points for additional NURBS splines. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the selected face. Point.

Point. and/or splines. 5. Repeat step 3 to create additional points at different distances. or spline close to one endpoint. Note: To create the point at the position of an existing point entity. 2. Mastercam displays a temporary indicator of the plane in the graphics window. 5. Creating a point at a defined distance along a curve 1. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Note: Mastercam will create the point at a defined distance from the endpoint closest to the cursor position when you select the entity. Set parameters on the Slice menu. then choose Done. move the base of the display arrow to the side of the curves to keep after trimming. 4. Choose Main Menu. then left-click to create a point at that position. 14 . If prompted. Create. arc. Choose Main Menu. Repeat step 4 to create additional points on the same face. Create. Note: Entering the same value twice in a row exits you from the function. 5. select one of the highlighted entities. Creating points at the intersections of a slice plane with curves This function slices selected curves with a plane and creates points at positions where the plane intersects the curves. 6. to create points at a defined spacing interval from the intersections. Select one or more lines. Press [Esc] to exit the function. then choose Do it. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to create additional points. Move the base of the arrow to a desired position. 7. enter the distance to create the point from the selected endpoint. Select a line. You also have options to create the points at offset positions. In the prompt area. Length. and to trim the curves to the resulting points. Define the slice plane. arcs. move the cursor crosshairs over the point. 4. then left-click. 6. type [S] to activate snapping.4. then left-click. 3. Point. 3. or press [Esc] twice to exit the function. Press [Esc] and repeat steps 2 through 4 to create points on a different face. Slice. 2. 1.

Choose Main Menu. continue with step 10. then press Done. enter a file name. 3. In the prompt area. 8. 10. Set parameters on the Projection menu. In the prompt area. At the prompt. If prompted that a file of the same name already exists. Press [Enter] to continue. Type a comment to display at the top of the file (optional). create lines along the projection paths. Repeat steps 5 through 10 to project additional points. 11. Note: Entering a zero value creates the point directly on the curve. then choose Do it. Create. enter one or more points.Projecting points onto surfaces and solids You can use this function to create points at the projection positions. Creating a point at a perpendicular distance from a curve 1. 5. 3. then press [Esc]. Perp/dist. If you entered a value greater than zero in step 4. 12. 15 . and/or solid faces. Select a line. 7. Select one or more surfaces. 9. enter a value for the distance from the curve that you want the point to be created. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Otherwise. Choose Main Menu. 2. arc. Mastercam displays a temporary line on both sides of the curve. 1. 2. Create. Mastercam reports the number of points that were successfully projected. or spline in the graphics window. then choose Done. Enter a point on or near the selected curve where you want the perpendicular distance to be calculated. choose Append to add the current data to the end of the existing file or Overwrite to replace the existing data with the current data. Point. If No was selected in step 3. If prompted. choose Yes to select existing point entities or No to enter points at any position in the graphics window. Select the line on the side of the curve where you want to create the point. 4. and/or save the projection data to a file. solids. 4. Point. If Yes was selected in step 3. Srf project. select one or more points. then choose Save and continue with the remaining steps. 5. 6. then press [Enter] to view the file. Close the file.

Next menu. This is useful for determining the boundaries of an individual curve in a chain of curves. 2. 4. Repeat step 3 to create additional points. Choose Main Menu. 1. 4. Creating points at the center of selected arcs 1. 16 . Next menu.Creating points in a grid pattern 1. 5. Point. Endpoints. Set parameters on the From Small Arcs/Circles menu. Enter a point to position the center of the bolt circle. Next menu. Choose Yes to create and save the actual points. arcs. Choose Main Menu. Creating points in a bolt circle pattern 1. then choose Done. Choose Main Menu. Small arcs. 4. or press [Esc] to exit the function. then choose Do it. Displaying and saving entity endpoints Choosing the Endpoints option on the Screen menu lets you view and create point entities at the endpoints of all visible lines. ¨ Choose Save dups to change the setting as follows: Set to Y to create all displayed points. 3. then choose Do it. Create. even if duplicate points result. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional grids. then choose Do it. 3. and splines. 3. Point. Set parameters on the Grid menu. Grid. 2. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional bolt circles. Bolt circle. Mastercam displays the points for you to view and prompts you to save them. 3. 2. ¨ Set to N to create a single point at each endpoint position and discard any duplicate points that occupy the same position in the graphics window. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Enter a point to position the lower left corner of the grid. Screen. 5. Create. Point. or choose No to discard them. Choose Main Menu. Note: Save Dups has no effect if you discard the points (see step 3). Select one or more arcs in the graphics window. Set parameters on the Bolt Circle menu. Create. 2.

2. Choose Main Menu. Create. Creating a horizontal line 1. You can access the Line menu by choosing Main Menu. Enter two points for the endpoints of the line. Choose Main Menu. Line. Choose Main Menu. Repeat step 2 to create additional lines.Creating lines The Line menu gives you options for creating line entities. 17 . Press [Esc] to exit the function. Endpoints. Click on the topics below for more information. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Create. 3. Line. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Enter a point for the second endpoint of the line. Creating multiple lines connected at their endpoints 1. Create. Line. Horizontal. 3. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional vertical lines. 5. In the prompt area. Enter two points for the endpoints of the line. Creating a vertical line 1. In the prompt area. Multi. 2. 4. 4. Line. Enter two points for the endpoints of the line. Vertical. Line. enter a value to position the line on the horizontal axis. Repeat step 3 to create additional lines. Create. 2. 4. 3. 5. Enter a point for the first endpoint of the first line. Create. Note: This point becomes the first endpoint of the next line that you create. 3. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional horizontal lines. Creating a line between any two points 1. Choose Main Menu. 2. enter a value to position the line on the vertical axis. 4.

In the prompt area. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 5. Tangent. 2. Creating a line tangent to an arc or spline at a defined angle 1. Create. 4. Creating polar lines 1.5. Note: Select both entities close to where you want to create the tangent line because multiple solutions may be possible. Choose Main Menu. Create. Line. 3. Tangent. enter the angle of the line. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional tangent lines. Enter the length of the line. 18 . Select an arc or spline. enter the angle of the line. Line. 3. 5. Create. Enter a point for the first endpoint of the line. Enter the length of the line. 2. 2. Line. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional lines. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Tangent. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 4. Choose Main Menu. 7. Select the line to keep. Choose Main Menu. Note: Select the entity close to where you want to create the tangent line because multiple solutions may be possible. Note: The line may be created on an extended portion of the selected entity. 6. 6. Creating a line tangent to two arcs 1. Line. Select two arcs. You can access the Tangent Line menu by choosing Main Menu. In the prompt area. Click on the topics below for more information. 2 arcs. Angle. Creating tangent lines The Tangent Line menu gives you options for creating lines that are tangent to arcs and splines. Create. Polar.

19 . Creating a line tangent to an arc or spline through a point 1. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional tangent lines. In the prompt area. Enter a point for the perpendicular line to pass through.3. Point. Enter a point for the tangent line to pass through. 5. Note: The line may be created on an extended portion of the selected entity. Note: The line may be created on an extended portion of the selected entity. Create. Select an arc or spline. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Click on the topics below for more information. arc. 4. Create. or spline. 4. Creating a line perpendicular to a curve through a point 1. 7. 4. Select a line. Create. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Line. 3. You can access the Perpendicular menu by choosing Main Menu. 6. Perpendclr. If prompted. Creating perpendicular lines The Perpendicular menu gives you options for creating lines that are perpendicular to curves. Note: Enter the point close to where you want to create the tangent line because multiple solutions may be possible. Choose Main Menu. 5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional perpendicular lines. enter the length of the line. Press [Esc] to exit the function. In the prompt area. Choose Main Menu. 2. Tangent. Line. Repeat step 2 to create additional tangent lines. 2. 3. Line. Perpendclr. enter the length of the line. Point. 6. select the line to keep.

Creating a line perpendicular to a line and tangent to an arc 1. Point. 4. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Line. Select an arc for the perpendicular line to be tangent to. Choose Main Menu. 2. 5. 7. Line. In the prompt area. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional parallel lines. 20 . Note: The line may be created on an extended portion of the selected entity. 3. enter the offset distance. Create. Creating parallel lines The Parallel menu gives you options for creating parallel lines. Creating a parallel line through a point 1. Select a line. Click on the topics below for more information. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 6. Mastercam creates each parallel line by offsetting an existing line by a defined distance or through a point. 2. 6. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Select the line to keep. enter the length of the line. Side/dist. 4. 4. Create. Indicate the offset direction by left-clicking on one side or the other of the selected line. Select a line. Choose Main Menu. Select a line for the new line to be perpendicular to. 3. Line. Creating a parallel line using an offset distance and direction 1. Enter a point for the parallel line to pass through. 5. In the prompt area. You can access the Parallel menu by choosing Main Menu. Perpendclr. Parallel. Arc. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional perpendicular lines. Note: The parallel line is the same length as the reference line selected in step 2. 5. Line. 2. Parallel. Create. Choose Main Menu. Repeat step 3 to create additional parallel lines. Create. Note: The parallel line is the same length as the reference line selected in step 2. Parallel. 3.

Create. The direction is perpendicular to the curve at every point along the curve relative to the current construction plane. Xform. Choose Main Menu. 3. Line. Enter a value for Offset distance and Number of steps. select the type of operation to perform: Move or Copy. it displaces it by a defined distance and direction. Select a line. depending on the offset direction. 4. ¨ Offsetting an arc or circle creates a larger or smaller arc or circle. Select a line. 6. Offsetting a single curve When Mastercam offsets a single curve. 5. Notes: ¨ Offsetting a spline by a distance greater than the radius of the smallest curve in the spline may cause the spline to self-intersect. Select an arc for the parallel line to be tangent to. Offset.Creating a parallel line tangent to an arc 1. 5. The parallel line is the same length as the reference line selected in step 2. Notes: ¨ ¨ The line may be created on an extended portion of the selected entity. 21 . Note: If you entered a negative offset distance on the Offset dialog box. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional parallel lines. or spline in the graphics window. Parallel. 2. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Mastercam moves the entity in the opposite direction from the one you indicate. On the Offset dialog box. Mastercam offsets the curve. Select the line to keep. Offsetting inside the perimeter creates a smaller circle. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to offset additional curves or press [Esc] to exit the function. 3. Offsetting outside the perimeter creates a larger circle. arc. Choose Main Menu. then choose OK to close the dialog box. 4. Arc. Click on one side or the other of the selected entity to indicate the offset direction. 1. 2. 6.

arc. see Creating parallel lines. Click on the topics below for more information. Mastercam calculates arcs in a counterclockwise direction. Mastercam creates a midline. Creating a line at the closest position between two curves or a curve and a point Note: For intersecting lines. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional bisecting lines or midlines. CREATING ARCS The Arc menu gives you options for creating arc entities (including circles).¨ The Create. Note: If the intersection point is out of view. Create. For parallel lines. 1. or spline. Mastercam displays the length of the resulting entity in the prompt area. If prompted. 5. Arc. 3. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 3. Line. 6. line. Press [Esc] to exit the function. enter the length of the line. 1. Closest. Select two lines. You can access the Polar Arc menu by choosing Main Menu. Select a line. Bisect. Create. Select a point. select the bisecting line to keep. Create. Polar. Mastercam creates a bisecting line. 5. Choose Main Menu. In the prompt area. or spline. Line. arc. which begins midway between the start of the first selected line and the closest endpoint of the second selected line. Parallel function gives you several options for offsetting single lines. You can access the Arc menu by choosing Main Menu. For more information. Choose Main Menu. Arc. Click on the topics below for more information. 22 . 4. 2. Mastercam creates a point. Create. 4. Creating polar arcs The Polar Arc menu gives you options for creating arcs using polar coordinates. Line. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional lines. Creating a bisecting line or a midline Note: For intersecting lines. press [Alt+F1] to fit the geometry to the screen. 2.

3. Enter a point for the center of the arc. 5. Enter the start angle of the arc in degrees. Polar. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional arcs. Creating a polar arc with a defined starting point 1. Enter a point for the starting point of the arc. Enter the initial angle of the arc in degrees. Choose Main Menu. Arc. In the prompt area. Arc. 7. Create. enter the radius of the arc. Start pt. Enter the final angle of the arc in degrees. Note: You can create a full circle by entering 0 for the initial angle and 360 for the final angle. Enter a point for the center of the arc. Choose Main Menu. Enter a point for the end angle of the arc. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 6. 7. Create. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional arcs. 4. 1. In the prompt area. Note: You can create a full circle by entering the same point for the initial and final angles. 3. 4. 2. Press [Esc] to exit the function. In the prompt area. 6. Sketch. 23 . Create. 2. Creating a polar arc with a defined center point and by sketching the start/end angles 1. 4. Arc. 6. enter the radius of the arc. Polar. Center pt.Creating a polar arc with a defined center point and start/end angles Note: You can create a full circle by entering 0 for the initial angle and 360 for the final angle. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional arcs. Enter a point for the start angle of the arc. 7. 2. 5. Polar. 5. Choose Main Menu. enter the radius of the arc. Enter the end angle of the arc in degrees. 3.

3. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 4. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 6. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional arcs. Note: The radius that you enter in step 3 must be greater than or equal to half the distance between the two points that you enter. Enter the start angle of the arc in degrees. 2. Create. 4. 5. Choose Main Menu. 6. In the prompt area. Enter the end angle of the arc in degrees. enter the radius of the arc. Select the arc to keep. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional arcs. Note: You can create a full circle by entering 0 for the initial angle and 360 for the final angle. Create. Creating an arc with three defined edge points 1. Repeat step 2 to create additional arcs. 3. 2. Arc.Creating a polar arc with a defined ending point 1. Choose Main Menu. 24 . Enter three unique points. Arc. Endpoints. In the prompt area. Create. Note: No more than two of the points that you enter in step 2 can be collinear. Enter a point for the ending point of the arc. enter the radius of the arc. 3. End pt. 5. 3 points. Creating an arc with a defined radius and endpoints 1. Polar. Arc. 7. Choose Main Menu. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 2. Enter two points for the endpoints of the arc. 4.

Tangent. The arc may be created on an extended portion of the selected entities. enter the radius of the circle. Create. Select a line or arc. Select the arc to keep. enter the radius of the arc. Tangent. 2. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 25 Choose Main Menu. Create. ¨ The arc may be created on an extended portion of the selected entity. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 4. . 3. Arc. In the prompt area. or splines. 3. 5. Choose Main Menu. 6. Create. 6. Enter a point for the arc to be tangent with the selected entity. Creating an arc tangent to one arc or line 1. select the circle to keep. 1 entity. Creating a circle tangent to two curves 1. 2 entities. Arc. Tangent. the system projects the point along the normal vector of the selected entity.Creating tangent arcs The Tangent Arc menu gives you options for creating arcs that are tangent to curves and points. Notes: ¨ The radius that you enter in step 2 must be greater than or equal to half the distance between the closest points on the two curves that you select in step 3. Select two lines. Arc. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to create additional circles. 5. 2. Notes: ¨ If the point that you enter in step 3 does not lie on the selected line or arc. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional arcs. Click on the topics below for more information. You can access the Tangent Arc menu by choosing Main Menu. In the prompt area. 7. arcs. 4. ¨ ¨ You cannot create the arc between two parallel lines. If prompted.

Choose Main Menu. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional circles. Notes: ¨ ¨ The lines you select in steps 2 and 3 cannot be parallel to one another. 7. Select a line to pass through the center of the circle. Select a line for the circle to be tangent to. 3. lines. 2. Notes: ¨ ¨ You cannot create a tangent arc between three parallel lines. Tangent. 6. Arc. Arc. enter the radius of the circle. Creating an arc tangent to a line or arc with a defined edge point 1. 3. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Create. 5. Choose Main Menu. Point. 4. 26 . Choose Main Menu. lines. Creating a circle tangent to a line using a defined center line 1. Select the circle to keep. press [Alt+F1] to fit the geometry to the screen. Arc. and/or arcs. Press [Esc] to exit the function. In the prompt area. this function always creates a full circle and does not give you the option to trim the selected entities Creating an arc tangent to three points. 2.¨ While similar to filleting two curves. The arc may be created on an extended portion of the selected entities. Tangent. Create. Select three points. Repeat step 2 to create additional arcs. Create. 3 ents/pts. Center line. 4. The circle may be created on an extended portion of the selected line. and arcs 1. Tangent. Note: If the circles are out of view. Note: Choose Point entry to enter tangent points in the graphics window.

Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional arcs. Arc. Mastercam calculates 180 degrees between the points and fits a circle to them. or spline. 27 . Circ 2 pts. Creating an arc tangent to a curve at any position This function creates an arc that is less than or equal to 180 degrees. 4. then left-click. 7. 2. move the cursor crosshairs overt the point. Select the arc to keep. In the prompt area. 1. Enter a point for the second endpoint of the arc.2. Choose Main Menu. 6. if necessary. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 3. Tangent. type [S] to activate snapping. Enter two points to lie on the edge of the circle. Choose Main Menu. ¨ The arc may be created on an extended portion of the selected line. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Note: To set the tangent point to the position of an existing point. Create. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the selected entity. 2. Arc. ¨ The radius that you enter in step 4 must be greater than or equal to half the distance between the entity selected in step 2 and the point entered in step 3 at the closest pass between them. 3. Creating a circle using two defined edge points 1. then left-click. arc. 4. 4. to maintain 180 degrees or less. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional arcs. Enter a point for the arc to pass through. Repeat step 2 to create additional circles. 3. 5. Create. enter the radius of the arc. Dynamic. Select a line. Move the base of the arrow to a desired point. Mastercam adjusts the direction of the arc. 5. 6. Notes: Select a line or arc for the arc to be tangent to.

Press [Esc] to exit the function. 3. 5. Choose Main Menu. 4. 3. enter the diameter of the circle. Press [Esc] to exit the function. which can be either a point or crosshair. Arc. You can control 28 . Circ pt+edg.Creating a circle using three defined edge points 1. Arc. is real geometry that can be selected and manipulated like any other geometry. Automating and formatting arc center lines You can automatically mark the center of arcs as you create them. Circ pt+dia. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional circles. Repeat step 2 to create additional circles. 4. Circ pt+rad. Choose Main Menu. Enter a point for the center of the circle. Create. Creating a circle with defined center and edge points 1. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Enter a point for the center of the circle. enter the radius of the circle. The mark. In the prompt area. Enter a point for the center of the circle. 2. 3. 4. Arc. In the prompt area. 2. 2. Create. 5. 2. 3. Circ 3 pts. Choose Main Menu. 5. Create. Creating a circle with a defined center point and diameter 1. Create. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Enter three points to lie on the edge of the circle. Arc. Choose Main Menu. Enter a point to lie on the edge of the circle. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional circles. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional circles. Creating a circle with a defined center point and radius 1.

¨ ¨ 8. Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog Creating rectangular-shaped geometry The Rectangular Shape menu gives you options for creating rectangles and other geometric shapes (Obround. Choose Main Menu. 1. level. Choose Center Lines (arcs) The Automatic Center Lines dialog box opens. To place the mark on a different level. 29 . 5. In addition. ¨ 9. ¨ box. then either enter a line style number or choose Select and select a style. Double D. and Ellipse) that are composed of lines and/or arcs and are defined within a rectangular boundary. check Define in the Color group and either enter a color number or choose the color button to select a color from the palette. Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box. Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. To use a color different from the current system color. ¨ ¨ Choose Fixed length and enter a line length in current units. Choose No to use the settings only for the current Mastercam session. 2. you have the option to create a point at the center of the rectangular shape. Do one of the following: Enter or choose other defaults. 4. check Define in the Level group and either enter a level number or choose Select and select a level from the Levels dialog box. To control crosshair line length. do one of the following: ¨ Choose Percentage of diameter and enter a percent value. Configure. Unless you change the settings. To control crosshair line style.color. or Lines to mark the center with a crosshair. Select Point to mark the arc center with a point. 3. 7. Choose the CAD Settings tab. the mark uses the current system color. The crosshair line length will be the percentage of the arc diameter you entered. and/or a surface within the boundary of the rectangular shape. fillets at sharp corners on the rectangular shape. The System Configuration dialog box opens. and line style. Single D. do one of the following: Check Current to use the current system line style. level. Check Define. and style and crosshair size. Screen. 6.

Note: The angle increment is used to calculate the number of lines contained in the ellipse shape. Set the remaining parameters. Note: Be sure to select the square that represents the placement point to use on the rectangular shape. Repeat steps 6 and 7 to create the shape in additional positions in the graphics window. If prompted. Choose 1 point. Creating rectangular-shaped geometry with one defined placement point 1. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Set parameters on the Rectangle One Point dialog box. 6. 3. Note: The angle increment is used to calculate the number of lines contained in the ellipse shape. 8. Choose Options. 9. Select a rectangular shape from the list. Rectangle. 2. Choose Main Menu. 4. Click on the menu and topics below for more information. 30 . Choose Main Menu. Set the remaining parameters. 5. 7. 5. Rectangle. 2. Create. Enter a point to position the rectangular shape in the graphics window. 4. 7. If prompted. choose Main Menu. then choose OK. 8. A smaller value results in a smoother shape. Create. Choose Options. 6. Select a rectangular shape from the list. Create. enter the angle increment. Creating rectangular-shaped geometry with two defined placement points 1. then choose OK. 3. Choose 2 points. Repeat steps 7 and 8 to create the shape in additional positions in the graphics window.To access the Rectangular Shape menu. then choose OK. Rectangle. A smaller value results in a smoother shape. Enter two points for opposing corners of the rectangular shape. enter the angle increment. 10.

11. Options from the Main Menu. Polygon. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. Notes: ¨ You can change rectangular shape options by choosing Main Menu. 31 . You must have a minimum of three. Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog Creating a polygon You can create a polygon as a NURBS spline or as a collection of individual linked lines. The System Configuration dialog box opens. see Creating an ellipse. 12. The System Configuration dialog box reopens. see Rectangle Options dialog box. Choose No to use the settings only for the current Mastercam session. Rectangle. The Create Polygon dialog box displays.9. 2. Choose Rectangular Shapes. Create. Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. Choose the CAD Settings tab. Create. Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box. 8. Note: For information on creating an ellipse that is composed of a single NURBS spline. Choose OK to register your choices. ¨ Choose Main Menu. Next menu. 13. Press [Esc] to exit the function. For more information. Do one of the following: Enter or choose other defaults. The Rectangle Options dialog box opens. 9. Set parameters as follows: Number of sides – Sets the number of sides for the polygon. ¨ You can also access the System Configuration dialog box by pressing [Alt+F8]. ¨ box. 1. Setting default rectangular shape options The CAD Settings tab of the System Configuration dialog box lets you set defaults for rectangle creation options. Configure. Screen. Check the options you want Mastercam to use by default. 10.

Create. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Enter a point for the center of the polygon. When checked. Choose OK. 4. each representing a side of the polygon. Multi.Sets the type of entity to create for the polygon. The Create Ellipse dialog box displays. Creating multiple lines connected at their endpoints 1. 2. When checked. 3. which is the distance from the center of the polygon to the edge of the polygon. Creating an ellipse 1. Line. 4. this measures the polygon from the center to the midpoint of the sides. 2. Enter a point for the second endpoint of the line. 6. ¨ Rotation – Sets the angle that Mastercam uses to position one of the sides of the polygon relative to the current construction plane. Choose Main Menu. this measures the radius from the center of the polygon to the corners. Note: This point becomes the first endpoint of the next line that you create. Next menu. Set parameters as follows: X Axis Radius – Sets the radius of the ellipse’s horizontal axis Y Axis Radius – Sets the radius of the ellipse’s vertical axis Start Angle – Sets the angle that Mastercam begins creating the ellipse End Angle – Sets the angle that Mastercam finishes creating the ellipse 32 .¨ Radius – Sets the polygon’s radius. When left blank. Repeat step 3 to create additional lines. 5. Ellipse. ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 3. When left blank. ¨ Create NURBS . The Measure Corner option determines how Mastercam measures the radius. this creates the polygon as a single NURBS spline broken at the starting point. ¨ Measure radius to corner – Determines how Mastercam measures the radius of the polygon. 5. Create. Enter a point for the first endpoint of the first line. this creates the polygon as multiple lines. Repeat step 4 to create additional polygons using the current values.

Choose OK.¨ Rotation . which allows you to set the distance from the endpoint of the first line you select in step 4. and Angle. When selected. 5. 4. see Creating rectangular-shaped geometry. 5. 3.Sets the angle used to rotate the long axis of the ellipse about its center point Note: The Create Ellipse dialog box includes a preview window that shows how the ellipse will look. the Parameters area displays two distances: Distance 1 sets the distance from the endpoint of the first line you select to be chamfered (step 4). Select one of the following chamfer Methods: ¨ 1 Distance – Allows you to set the chamfer to equal distances from the endpoints of the two lines selected in step 4. Create. 3. 2. Select two non-parallel lines. the Parameters area displays two fields: Distance. 33 . ¨ 2 Distances – Allows you to set two separate distances. Enter a point for the center of the ellipse. Press [Esc] to exit the function. When selected. the Parameters area displays only one Distance field. When selected. Repeat step 4 to create additional ellipses using the current values. Distance 2 sets the distance from the endpoint of the second line you select to be chamfered (step 4). ¨ Dist/Angle – Allows you to set one distance and an angle. Chamfering lines 1. Next menu. Repeat step 4 to create additional chamfers. which allows you to set an angle that determines the chamfer of the second line you select in step 4. You can press [Enter] after changing any of the parameters to see how the changes effect the ellipse. The Chamfer dialog box displays. 4. 6. Notes: ¨ Mastercam creates each ellipse as a NURBS spline. Enter the necessary distances and angle values and choose OK. Chamfer. Choose Main Menu. ¨ For information on creating an ellipse shape using line segments. ¨ You can create a partial ellipse by entering a start angle greater than 0 degrees and/or an end angle less than 360 degrees.

¨ If you select the Chain selection option.6. 34 . Deselect this option if you do not want Mastercam to trim the selected lines. You can chamfer arcs using the 1 Distance and 2 Distances methods. Mastercam trims the curves to the fillet. You can access the Fillet menu by choosing Main Menu. which causes Mastercam to trim the selected lines to the chamfer. Modify. Create. you create an arc of a defined radius tangent to the curves. Filleting curves he Fillet menu gives you options for filleting curves. Notes: ¨ Press [Esc] to exit the function. ¨ The Trim option is selected by default. When you fillet curves. Fillet or by choosing Main Menu. Click on the menu and topics below for more information. Fillet. although you have the option to turn off trimming. By default. Mastercam prompts you to chain entities when you return to the graphics window.

Chain . L (Larger) to create fillets that are larger than 180 degrees. See Filleting corners along chains of curves for more information. Choose Y to activate trimming or N to deactivate trimming. Notes: ¨ This option applies only when Filleting corners along chains of curves. L. 35 .Displays the Chaining Methods menu where you can select chains of curves to create fillets at sharp corners along the chains.Radius – Determines the size of the resulting fillets. or clockwise (CW) corners (relative to the chaining direction). ¨ The ability to fillet only inside or outside corners of a chained boundary is particularly useful during geometry creation for wire EDM parts (punches and dies). P to create fillets at positive. Angle Determines the sweep of the fillet arc. Choose A to create fillets along all corners. This option toggles between S. Choose S (Smaller) to create fillets that are smaller than 180 degrees. Trim . and F. or N to create fillets at negative. These parts often require different radius values on inside versus outside corners in order to provide adequate corner clearance. This option is a Yes/No toggle. P.Determines whether Mastercam trims the selected curves to the fillet. CW /CWW – Determines which corners are used to create fillets along the chains of curves. or counterclockwise (CCW) corners (relative to the chaining direction). or F (Full) to create fillets that are full circles (360 degrees). and N. This option toggles between A.

arcs. and ‘F’ creates fillets that are full circles. You have the option to create fillets at all corners or at clockwise or counterclockwise corners. Mastercam displays the Fillet menu and shows the default menu values in the prompt area. 3. Chain function lets you create fillets at sharp corners along selected chains of curves. or F. Choose Main Menu. and ‘F’ creates fillets that are full circles. Filleting corners along chains of curves The Fillet. toggle Trim to Y or N. L. 7. or press [Esc] to exit the function. choose Radius. then enter a value for radius in the prompt area. 5. To change the sweep of the fillets (optional). When Trim is set to ‘N’.Filleting two curves 1. Mastercam trims the tangent curves to the resulting fillets. Notes: ¨ The radius you enter in step 2 must be greater than or equal to half the distance between the entities you select in step 5. 6. ‘L’ creates fillets larger than 180 degrees. or splines. ‘L’ creates fillets larger than 180 degrees. toggle Angle<180 to S. Select two lines. toggle Angle<180 to S. Modify. Fillet. To change the size of the fillets (optional). Fillet. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to create additional fillets. Note: Choosing ‘S’ creates fillets smaller than 180 degrees. 2. To change the sweep of the fillets (optional). 36 . If prompted. Create. toggle Trim to Y or N. To change the size of the fillets (optional). Fillet. 1. 4. To change the trimming mode (optional). Choose Main Menu. Note: When the Trim option is set to ‘Y’. or F. 3. Mastercam displays the Fillet menu and shows the default menu values in the prompt area. Note: Choosing ‘S’ creates fillets smaller than 180 degrees. Modify. L. ¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. then enter a value for radius in the prompt area. 4. Mastercam creates the fillets but does not trim the tangent curves. relative to the chaining direction. select the fillet to keep. choose Radius. To change the trimming mode (optional). 2.

Note: Choosing ‘A’ results in all corners being filleted (regardless of the chaining direction). 7. Notes: ¨ Repeat steps 2 through 8 to create additional fillets. 5. Choose Yes to change existing fillets to the current radius or No to maintain the original radii of existing fillets. Y0. then choose Done. 6. Select one or more chains of curves. Create. or N. toggle CW/CCW to A. Mastercam displays the prompt (in the menu area) shown below. Choose Chain. 9. To change which corners result in fillets (optional). Mastercam creates the fillets but does not trim the tangent curves. The Spiral function creates spiral geometry as a series of parametric splines. If the selected chains contain existing fillets. the Helix function lets you create a tapered helix as a parametric spline with the center at X0. Spiral/Helix dialog box The Spiral/Helix dialog box allows you to select between the Spiral function and the Helix function. ‘P’ results in counterclockwise corners (relative to the chaining direction) being filleted. Prior to version 9 of Mastercam. When Trim is set to ‘N’. ¨ The ability to fillet only inside or outside corners of a chained boundary (step 5) is particularly useful during geometry creation for wire EDM parts (punches and dies). You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. Mastercam trims the tangent curves to the resulting fillets. 8. or press [Esc] to exit the function. Mastercam displays the Chaining Methods menu. 37 . these two functions were separate C-Hooks. P. ‘N’ results in clockwise corners (relative to the chaining direction) being filleted. These parts often require different radius values on inside versus outside corners in order to provide adequate corner clearance.Note: When the Trim option is set to ‘Y’. Fillet.

5. ¨ Z Initial Pitch – Determines the distance in the Z axis between each revolution. 7 revolutions. ¨ Z Final Pitch – Sets the Z depth for the final revolution of the spiral. initial XY pitch of . ¨ Incremental Angle – Controls the number of points on each spline by specifying the angle at which Mastercam will recalculate the spiral. 3. The system calculates and displays the spiral in the graphics window. Choose OK.2. XY Final Pitch – Sets the pitch value for the final revolution of the spiral. 4. 5-degree angle.8. 2. Enter the parameters as follows: Radius – Sets the radius for the first spline in the spiral. Place the spiral using the Point Entry menu selections or by clicking the mouse button at the desired location.Creating a spiral 1. The following illustration shows a spiral created with a 1-inch radius. Next menu. ¨ Choose Main Menu. and final pitch values of zero. initial Z pitch of . which is the incremental distance (step down) in the Z where the spiral will begin. Create. The Spiral/Helix dialog box displays. Spiral/Helix. The Point Entry menu displays. ¨ ¨ ¨ # of revolutions – Sets the number of times the spiral will complete a 360-degree revolution XY Initial Pitch – Determines the amount that the radius increases in a single revolution. Select the Spiral radio button. 38 .

Create. 39 . The Point Entry menu displays. Y0. ¨ Choose Main Menu. Spline. Enter the parameters as follows: Starting Angle – Sets the angle at which the helix will begin. Radius – Sets the radius for the first spline in the spiral. Click on the menu and topics below for more information. 2. Select the Helix operation radio button. Spiral/Helix. Next menu. Creating splines The Spline menu gives you options for defining the method used to create the spline as well as parameters that further define the resulting geometry. The system calculates and displays the tapered helix in the graphics window. 3. You can access the Spline menu by choosing Main Menu. 5. centered on X0. ¨ Pitch – Sets the distance from a point on one thread to the corresponding point on the next thread measured parallel to the axis. ¨ Incremental Angle – Controls the number of points on each spline by specifying the angle at which Mastercam will recalculate the spiral. The Spiral/Helix dialog box displays. Place the helix using the Point Entry menu selections or by clicking the mouse button at the desired location. Choose OK. ¨ ¨ Taper Angle – Specifies the thread taper angle. ¨ # of revolutions – Sets the number of times the spiral will complete a 360-degree revolution 4.Creating a helix 1. Create.

Choose Main Menu. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to create additional splines. You can create a closed spline by entering the same point for the first and last points in step 4. 3. Choose Automatic from the Spline menu. 5. 3. 2. Create. Spline. 4. 6. Notes: ¨ You can create a closed spline by selecting the same point for the first and last points in step 4. 4. Set the Type and Ends parameters on the Spline menu. 1. Set the Type and Ends parameters on the Spline menu. 7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.Creating a spline using manual point entry 1. If prompted. Choose Manual from the Spline menu. 5. Choose Main Menu. 1. 2. 6. Creating a spline using automatic point entry This function creates a spline from a string of points that lie in a defined pattern. then press [Esc]. Enter points for the spline to pass through. Select three points. 40 . Press [Esc] to exit the function. Note: The spline passes through the first two points that you select then through all other points that lie within the pattern until it reaches the third selected point. If prompted. Spline. define the end condition of the spline’s endpoints. Create. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to create additional splines. Note: The resulting spline passes through the points you enter in step 3 in the order in which you enter them. define the end condition of the spline’s endpoints.

move the cursor crosshairs over the point. Create. or spline for the first blending curve. then choose Done. then left-click. blank. Set parameters on the From Curve(s) menu. 3. 4. To avoid distorting the intended shape of the spline. Select one or more chains of curves. 41 . Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional splines. 5. type [S] to activate snapping. Note: Mastercam creates a separate spline for each chain of curves that you select in step 4. Set parameters on the Spline Blending Between 2 Curves menu. arc. Choose Main Menu. 2. Select a line. 4. Choose Main Menu. Creating splines from existing curves This function creates splines based on the geometry of existing curves. 8. Create. You can set a tolerance that determines how closely each resulting spline matches the selected curves. Choose Blend from the Spline menu. or delete the original curves once the splines have been created. Creating a spline tangent to two curves 1. then choose Do it. Note: To set the point of tangency to an existing point. 2. 9. 7. 6. 1. delete or blank extraneous points.¨ Mastercam uses a combination of distance and direction from point to point to place the points in a sensible order. and you can choose to keep. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for a second blending curve. Spline. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the selected entity. Set the Type parameter on the Spline menu. then left-click. 5. Mastercam displays a temporary spline between the tangent points. Spline. 3. Choose Curves from the Spline menu. 6. Repeat steps 4 through 7 to create additional splines. Move the base of the arrow to the desired tangent position. Set the Type parameter on the Spline menu. then choose Do it. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Choose Natural. On the Spline End Conditions menu. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. 1. Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box. toggle Endpoint to F to set the end condition for the first endpoint or L to set the end condition of the last endpoint. 3. also the surfaces defined from them. 42 . ¨ ¨ ¨ Set the end condition of the selected endpoint by taking one of the following actions: Choose 3 pt arc. Select the default spline and surface type from the Spline/Surface creation type drop down menu. Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog Defining the tangency of a spline at its endpoints To define a spline’s end conditions. Choose No to use the settings only for the current Mastercam session. Screen. For more information. See Surface types for more information on surface types. enter the XYZ coordinates for the tangent vector. Configure. In the prompt area. 4. ¨ NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline) – curves defined by knots or control points. you must first create a spline using manual or automatic point entry with the Ends parameter set to Y. While these types will be generated by default. The System Configuration dialog box opens. 1. you can also select a type at the time you create the spline or surface. Choose Values. Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. The options are: ¨ Parametric – curves defined by coefficients or nodes. 2. Choose the CAD Settings tab. ¨ box. ¨ ¨ Curve-generated or parametric if curve generation is not permitted. 2. also the surfaces defined from them. see Creating a spline using manual point entry and Creating a spline using automatic point entry. Curve-generated or NURBS if curve generation is not permitted.Specifying spline and surface type defaults The CAD Settings tab of the System Configuration dialog box lets you specify the type of spline or surface Mastercam will create by default whenever you create a spline or surface. Do one of the following: Enter or choose other defaults.

Choose the TrueType® button. Note: You cannot reverse the vector direction if you set the end condition using 3 pt arc or Natural. ¨ ¨ In the Letters area. Letters. Choose Flip to reverse the direction of the vector. 2. Choose Angle. Creating geometric text using TrueTypeÒ fonts 1. In the prompt area. 6. Choose To entity. and NURBS splines. Creating geometric text The Create Letters dialog box gives you options for creating alphanumeric characters comprised of lines. You can access the Create Letters dialog box by choosing Main Menu. 7. enter the radius of the arc to write the letters along. ¨ Top of Arc – Places the letters along an arc starting at 180 degrees and continuing in a clockwise direction. or spline. Select an alignment for the text: Horizontal – Places the text left-to-right starting at the insertion point you select. arcs. Choose Do it to set the spline. Note: We recommend that you accept the default spacing. or spline. Vertical – Places the text top-to-bottom starting at the insertion point you select. which is calculated based on letter height. Next menu. arc. arc. The Create Letters dialog box displays. ¨ Bottom of Arc . if necessary. Select a font and font style. 5. Letters. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the other endpoint. Enter the height of the letters and the spacing between each letter. Select a line. enter the text to create as geometry. 3. Note: It is not necessary to select a font size. then choose OK.¨ ¨ ¨ 3. Choose Main Menu. The Font dialog displays.Places the letters along an arc starting at 180 degrees and continuing in a counterclockwise direction. Choose To end. Select a line. Create. Click on the topics below for more information. 43 . Next menu. enter the angle of the tangent vector. 4. Create. If you selected Top of Arc or Bottom of Arc for the alignment. if necessary.

You can use these files to create a string of geometric text. ¨ When creating letter geometry using TrueType fonts. and splines. The text appears in the graphics window. Choose the Drafting Globals button. 44 . Next menu. and Slant. Configure the parameters on the Note Text tab to obtain the desired appearance for the selected Note: The Drafting Globals parameters overwrite the Font and Height settings made in steps 2 and 4. See your Windows® documentation for more information about TrueType fonts. If the letters that you create are not the size that you want. 9. enter the text to create as geometry. Creating geometric text using pre-defined letter files Mastercam contains pre-defined letter files in four fonts: Block. Roman. Select a Drafting font from the Font pull-down menu. 6. Enter the Height for the letters in the Parameters area. Creating geometric text using drafting parameters 1. Press [Esc] when you are satisfied with the placement of the text. 2. Enter the start point for the letters. 9. Choose Main Menu. Notes: Choose OK.8. 4. 7. 5. you are limited only by the number of TrueType fonts that are installed on your personal computer. respectively. Choose OK twice. Letters. The Create Letters dialog box displays. Box. Next menu. Create. text. Enter a starting point for the text. ¨ The height of the actual letters may not match the value that you entered for letter height because the system scales the letters based on all of the information encoded into the TrueType font. Each file contains a letter or character comprised of lines. you can scale them. see Scaling entities using a single scale factor and Scaling entities using multiple scale factors. Letters. 3. The Drafting Globals dialog box displays. Create. In the Letters area. including blank space around the letters. 1. For more information. The Create Letters dialog box displays. 8. Choose Main Menu. arcs.

The last option (Other) lets you select a directory where you can store customized letter files. MC7. select one of the Block. Roman. Click the mouse. or Other type fonts you want to use. 9. Depending on the font you select. 1. 4. MC8. or GE3 file. To prevent overwriting Mastercam’s pre-defined letter files. Enter the name of an MC9. Pattern. save the edited file to a different directory. The Create Pattern dialog box displays. 7. each representing a different font. enter the letters to create as geometry. If prompted. From the Font pull-down menu. Rather than recreate it each time you need it. ¨ Choose Main Menu. If the Spacing parameter is active. If active.Places the letters along an arc starting at 180 degrees and continuing in a counterclockwise direction. 10. In the Height area. 2. or select the Browse button to locate the file. MC8. Choose OK.2. In the Letters area. Box. If you selected "Other" and have created your own fonts. MC7. enter the radius of the arc to write the letters along. and Mastercam creates the letters in the graphics window. or GE3) into the current file. 5. based on the Mastercam predefined font files. Create. if necessary. ¨ Bottom of Arc . select an alignment for the text as follows: ¨ ¨ Horizontal – Places the text left-to-right starting at the insertion point you select. 8. Next menu. enter the letter spacing. the Alignment choices may or may not be active. Set additional parameters as follows: Scale – Sets the scale of the pattern entities. 45 . ¨ Top of Arc – Places the letters along an arc starting at 180 degrees and continuing in a clockwise direction. Note: The first four directories contain predefined letter files. 3. This function is useful if you have a part such as a nut or bolt that you use repeatedly in your work. select ASCII File names to indicate that you have ASCII file names for the fonts. Importing pattern entities into the current file You can import entities contained in an existing file (MC9. Slant. Note: You can open the geometry file of any Mastercam letter/character and edit the file. 6. you can import it into the current file as many times as needed. 3. Vertical – Places the text top-to-bottom starting at the insertion point you select. enter the letter height.

4. Mirror Z – Mirrors the pattern entities about the Cplane’s Z axis relative to the construction origin. ¨ ¨ file. Notes: ¨ It is useful to store files containing pattern entities in a separate directory (e. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Set the Create parameters as follows: Lines – Creates lines along the edges of the bounding box. Mastercam identifies the entities as a group in the database for future use. Toolpaths cannot be imported. Enter a point for the center of the pattern file. Pattern files) so that they are easy to find when you use this function. Creating bounding box geometry The Bounding Box dialog box lets you create points and lines to mark the center and extents of a bounding box. Select the check box to apply the current system color and level to the pattern entities. which is a box-shaped boundary that is calculated around selected entities in the graphics window. see Working with groups.. Leave the check box blank to maintain the original color and level of the pattern entities. Mirror X – Mirrors the pattern entities about the Cplane’s X axis relative to the construction origin. For more information about groups. 6. Choose OK. The Bounding Box dialog box displays. 46 . 7. Create. Mastercam names the group using the pattern file name and a number to ensure the uniqueness of the group name. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. defining alternate construction planes and origins. and translating a part to a new position in the graphics window. Points – Creates points at the corners of the bounding box. This geometry can be useful for checking the overall dimensions of a part.g. Bound box. 5. Solids and dimensions can be. 1. Choose Undo Last to remove pattern entities in the order in which they were created in the current Repeat step 5 to create the pattern entities at additional positions. Note: The pattern entities are created in the current Cplane. ¨ Use Main Color and Level . Next menu. Mirror Y – Mirrors the pattern entities about the Cplane’s Y axis relative to the construction origin.¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ Rotation – Sets the angle to rotate the pattern entities. ¨ Each time you import a set of pattern entities into the current file. 2.Sets the color and level of the pattern entities.

or generated. select the entities that the bounding box will surround and choose Done. If you did not select the All entities option. Surface options. ¨ ¨ ¨ 4. splines). Entity association occurs between the following entities: ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ Between curve-generated surfaces and their reference curves Between offset surfaces and their generating surfaces Between trimmed surfaces and their generating (base) surfaces Between surface curves and the surfaces on which they lie Surface types Mastercam lets you create three types of surfaces: parametric. for Coons. arcs. if desired. from other surfaces. Parametric 47 . think of the original. However. which you create from curves (lines. Y – Sets the distance to extend the bounding box beyond the selected entities in the Y direction. A surface is a 2D or 3D shape that has area. Surface associativity Entity association refers to the dependent relationship between one entity and a second entity or group of entities from which the first entity is generated. entity or entities as the "parent" and the resultant. entity as the "child. For most Create. Swept. as follows: X – Sets the distance to extend the bounding box beyond the selected entities in the X direction. Select the All entities box if you want the bounding box to select all entities. you can choose only Parametric and NURBS. Create. Z – Sets the distance to extend the bounding box beyond the selected entities in the Z direction. Click on the topics below for more information. Set the Expand parameters. Each type describes a method that the system uses to calculate and store mathematical data about the surface. 6." which depends on the parent for its definition. 5. SURFACES Creating and modifying surfaces The Surface menu gives you options for creating and modifying surfaces. and Blend surfaces. Each surface type is described below. Surface. and curve-generated. or generating. or from pre-defined shapes. Choose OK. You can access the Surface menu by choosing Main Menu. NURBS. Center point – Creates a point at the center of the bounding box. you can choose from all three surface types. To understand the relationship between dependent entities.¨ 3.

parametric surfaces have the following characteristics: ¨ ¨ ¨ Compatible with IGES and VDA conversions Not associated with their generating curves Require a large amount of data storage NURBS The NURBS method of storing surface information is analogous to the NURBS method of storing spline information. However. ¨ Not associated with their generating curves Curve-generated When the system stores a surface as a curve-generated surface. Converters function can be output to VDA only if they are bicubic (mathematical degree 3 by 3). A patch is an area of the surface bounded by four segments of generating curves. surfaces that you bring in from another source using the File. However. but with slightly more computing time Compatible with IGES conversion Can be output to VDA file format (if created in Mastercam) Note: Due to limitations with the VDA file format. In addition. 48 .The parametric method of storing surface information is analogous to the parametric method of storing spline information. NURBS surfaces have the following characteristics: ¨ ¨ ¨ Require less data storage than parametric surfaces. it stores a direct reference back to the original curves. Create functions Creating a lofted surface The Loft option creates surfaces using a smooth blending of a minimum of two curves or chains of curves. curve-generated surfaces have the following characteristics: ¨ ¨ Require less data storage than parametric or NURBS surfaces Associated with their generating curves Note: Curve-generated surfaces store exact data about their generating curves (rather than approximations). In addition. a parametric surface expands each curve segment in a second direction resulting in a patch. In addition. a NURBS surface expands the string of control points in a second direction resulting in a grid. You can analyze a surface to determine if it is bicubic.

49 . When you select a curve or chain of curves. which lets you match curves manually or by entity. Note: When you select curves for a loft surface. Set parameters on the Lofted Surface menu. you may want to select your curves using the Sync chaining method . Select two or more curves or chains of curves. then choose Done. In order to better match your curves or chains of curves. Loft. Create. 2. then choose Do it to create the surface. the system places a temporary arrow at the closest endpoint to show which end you have selected. Choose Main Menu. 3. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 4.) compose one edge of the surface. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional lofted surfaces. Surface. node. branch. it is important that you pay attention to where you select each curve or chain of curves because the selected ends of each pair of curves (curves one and two. or point. etc. 5. curves two and three.1.

Enter the number of patches to use in the ‘across’ direction. 4. Choose Main Menu. Select the CAD Settings tab and choose Ask each time. Coons. Note: Mastercam eliminates this step for Coons surfaces that you create during the remainder of the Mastercam session if you check Don’ t ask again. Choose Do it to create the Coons surface. If at any time you want to regain access to this dialog box. Set parameters on the Coons menu. a type of chaining selection used only for this function.Creating a Coons surface This option lets you create a surface from a grid of curves. Note: For help on the menu options. There are two types of Coons chaining: automatic and manual. 50 . 6. 5. Repeat steps 3 through 7 to create additional Coons surfaces or press [Esc] to exit the function. Creating a Coons surface using manual Coons chaining 1. enter the number of patches to use in the ‘along’ direction. choose Screen. In the prompt area. Surface. press [Alt+H]. you must use Coons chaining. Create. Follow the system prompts to select the ‘along’ and ‘across’ chains. Config. then choose Done to complete chaining. In order to create Coons surfaces. 2. 3. 7. Click on the topics below for more information. Choose No (not to use automatic Coons chaining) on the Automatic Coons Chaining dialog box. 8. as needed.

Create. Configure. Select the CAD Settings tab and choose Ask each time. 51 . Check Ask each time to make Mastercam query the operator. 3. Choose Main Menu. Check No to disable Coons Auto Chaining. Select the end of a curve at the lower-right corner of the geometry. 3. 1. Do one of the following: Check Yes to use Coons Auto Chaining by default. Surface. Screen.Creating a Coons surface using automatic Coons chaining 1. You can enable Coons Auto Chaining so that it is always used. Set parameters on the Coons menu. 4. or make Mastercam ask the operator to approve its use each time. 5. 2. press [Alt+H]. Choose Do it to create the Coons surface. Choose the CAD Settings tab. Repeat steps 3 through 6 to create additional Coons surfaces or press [Esc] to exit the function. 7. as needed. If at any time you want to regain access to this dialog box. Note: For help on the menu options. The System Configuration dialog box opens. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. Enabling Coons Auto Chaining Coons Auto Chaining lets you define a Coons surface by selecting three entities: two curves that meet in the upper left corner and one curve in the lower right corner of the geometry. Do one of the following: Enter or choose other defaults. choose Screen. Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box. Note: Mastercam eliminates this step for Coons surfaces that you create during the remainder of the Mastercam session if you check Don’ t ask again. Choose Yes (to use automatic Coons chaining) on the Automatic Coons Chaining dialog box. which forces the operator to use manual chaining. ¨ ¨ ¨ 4. Coons. You can also disable Coons Auto Chaining. 6. Select two curves that intersect at the upper-left corner of the geometry. Config. 2.

or patch. Along curves lie in rows that are parallel to the stepping direction. You define the along curves for the entire surface first. you can enter a different value by choosing Angle from the menu area before selecting the entities that you want to chain. Mastercam uses a minimum branch angle to determine which entities to chain when there are intersecting entities.Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. The default value for the minimum branch angle is 30 degrees. Across curves lie in columns that are perpendicular to the stepping direction. Choose No to use the settings only for the current Mastercam session. The following graphic shows the selection of two across curves and two along curves to form a square. you must understand patch layout. Manual Coons Chaining In order to understand manual Coons chaining. The system does not chain any entity that intersects at an angle larger than the minimum branch angle. Coons patch boundaries are laid out in a grid of along and across curves. Note: If you don’t get the results you want using automatic Coons chaining. try using manual Coons chaining. ¨ box. followed by the across curves. 52 . Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog Automatic Coons Chaining Automatic Coons chaining lets you define a surface patch based on three entities: the two curves that meet in the upper-left corner and one curve in the lower-right corner of your geometry. However.

Be consistent when selecting the start of each across and along curve. Following these graphics you see a top view of the curves and the seven selection steps required to create the surface using manual Coons chaining. Note: Where you select each curve affects your results. The following example shows graphics of the same curves and Coons surface used in the Automatic Coons Chaining example that required three selection steps. 53 .The following graphic shows how multiple patches form a 3-by-3 grid that defines the Coons surface.

54 .Note: This example shows a 1-by-2 grid. Coons surface blending methods The following graphics show a sample surface (shown below in isometric view) created using each of the Coons blending methods (shown in side view).

55 .Creating a ruled surface The Ruled option creates surfaces using a linear blending a minimum of two curves or chains of curves.

) compose one edge of the surface. 2. ¨ ¨ 4. type a value in the displayed text box. The Ruled surface parameters menu displays. Select two or more curves or chains of curves. the system places a temporary arrow at the closest endpoint to show which end you have selected. then press [Enter]. N (NURBS). two and three. Choose Do it to create the surface. Create. branch. Surface. When you select a curve or chain of curves. you may want to select your curves using the Sync chaining method . Choose Tolerance. Choose Main Menu. 3. or point.1. node. 56 . Ruled. which lets you match curves manually or by entity. or C (curve-generated). Rectangle function creates a ruled surface based on the extents of a rectangle or rectangular shape. Notes: ¨ The Create. etc. such as an obround. ¨ When you select curves for a ruled surface. then choose Done. it is important that you pay attention to where you select each curve or chain of curves because the selected ends of each pair of curves (curve one and two. Take one or more of the following actions: Toggle Type to P (parametric). In order to better match your curves or chains of curves.

Select one or more chain of curves. the system displays a temporary arrow at one end of the axis to indicate the rotation direction. 3. 2. When you select the axis. choose Create. Select a line for the axis of rotation. then choose Done. 4. The system revolves one or more selected chains of curves (profile entities) about a single line (axis of rotation). The Chaining Methods menu displays. From the Main Menu. Surface. The displays. as needed. 57 . then choose Do it to create the revolved surfaces. The following graphics identify a profile entity and axis of rotation and show them used in a full and partial rotation.Creating a revolved surface This option creates a surface that is circular in one direction. Revolved. 1. Set parameters on the Revolved Surface menu.

Choose Main Menu. ¨ ¨ 5. Surface. These chains define cross-sections of the resulting surface. ¨ 2 or more across/1 along: Mastercam transitions from one section chain to the next in the order in which you defined them while following one path chain. Change the sweep of the surface by taking one of the following actions: Enter an angle value for Sweep. Mastercam moves to the next step automatically. 2. Select a curve-generated revolved surface. Select one or two ‘along’ chains of curves for the sweep path. toggle it to Y. ¨ 1. Choose Main Menu. Create. Sweep. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Analyze. 58 .Editing the sweep of a revolved surface 1. You can define a swept surface using the following combinations of across (section) and along (path) chains: ¨ 1 across/1 along: Mastercam sweeps one section chain along one path chain. 1 across/2 along: Mastercam proportionally scales one section chain between two path chains. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. In this case. This is known as a linear blend. see Translate/Rotate Example. Note: For more information about curve-generated surfaces. 3. Choose OK to close the dialog box. Enter an angle value for Start Angle and/or End Angle. The chains that define the path or trajectory of the sweep are called ‘ along’ chains. 3. then choose Done. You have the option to translate or rotate the cross-section chain along the path. The chains that you select to sweep are called ‘across’ chains. you can select only one path chain. 2. 6. you do not have to choose Done . 4. Note: If you selected more than one chain in step 2. Creating a swept surface The Sweep function creates a surface by sweeping chains of curves along a path. then choose Done. Select one or more ‘across’ chains of curves to define the cross-sections of the surface. Mastercam calculates the angle from the surface’s end angle. For more information. see Surface types.

¨ Toggle Trans/Rot to T to translate the section chain along the path chain or R to rotate the section chain as it is translated along the path chain. Note: The following graphics show three swept surfaces created using various combinations of across and along chains. choose Type to toggle it to N (NURBS) or P (parametric). Note: This option is available only when one across chain and one along chain are selected. or press [Esc] to exit the function. 1 across/1 along 59 . type a tolerance value. and translate/rotate settings. Note: The surface tolerance determines how closely the resulting surface fits the along and across curves. use the Swept Surface menu to edit these settings by taking the following actions: ¨ To edit the surface error tolerance. In the prompt area. surface type. In the prompt area. see Surface types. For more information.4. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional swept surfaces. choose Tolerance. see Translate/Rotate Example. 5. Mastercam displays the current surface error tolerance. then press [Enter]. For more information. Choose Do it to create the Swept surface. If necessary. 6. ¨ To edit the surface type.

Choose Main Menu. then choose Done. 4.2 across/1 along Creating draft surfaces using a defined length 1. Mastercam displays the Draft Surface menu and lists the current menu settings in the prompt area. 60 . Mastercam displays the Chaining Methods menu. Create. Draft. The default surface length is listed in the prompt area. To change this length. 2. Surface. 3. Select one or more chains of curves (lines. choose Length. Note: Mastercam creates a separate draft surface for each individual entity in each chain of curves. Toggle To plane to N. arcs. then enter a value for length in the prompt area. splines).

Choose Main Menu. then choose Done. To change this value. 5. The default draft angle is listed in the prompt area. the shape of a curve (line. Select one or more chains of curves (lines. To change the draft direction. or to exit the function. choose Angle. A direction arrow on the first selected chain reflects the current draft direction. 8. 9. Note: The default view is the current construction plane (Cplane). then enter a value for length in the prompt area. 6. splines). choose Length. For information on creating draft surfaces. To change this length. To change the draft direction. choose View. 2. press [Esc] About draft surfaces A draft surface is created by extruding. 3. 61 . 4. Mastercam displays a menu where you can select a new view. Note: The default view is the current construction plane (Cplane). For more information. Note: A zero value produces no tilt and is the equivalent of a perpendicular extrusion. or driving out.5. Mastercam displays the Draft Surface menu and lists the current menu settings in the prompt area. Note: Mastercam creates a separate draft surface for each individual entity in each chain of curves. or degree of tilt. Mastercam displays the Chaining Methods menu. Mastercam displays a menu where you can select a new view. or C for curvegenerated. To change this value. Choose Do it to create the draft surface(s). arc. click on the following topics: Creating draft surfaces using a defined length 1. The default surface length is listed in the prompt area. To create draft surfaces on additional curves. N for NURBS. arcs. choose View. then enter a value between ±180° in the prompt area. choose Curves. Note: A zero value produces no tilt and is the equivalent of a perpendicular extrusion. 7. The default draft angle is listed in the prompt area. which is calculated perpendicular to a selected view (You may need to rotate the geometry to see the arrow). choose Angle. Draft. often with an angle. Set the type of draft surface(s) to create. which is calculated perpendicular to a selected view (You may need to rotate the geometry to see the arrow). 6. A direction arrow on the first selected chain reflects the current draft direction. then enter a value between ±180° in the prompt area. Toggle To plane to N. then repeat steps 2 through 8. Choose P for parametric. see Surface types. or spline) in a linear direction perpendicular to some view. Create. The draft surface extends to a defined length or plane. Surface.

then enter a value between ±180° in the prompt area. To create draft surfaces on additional curves. 3. 6. arcs. choose Angle. Choose Do it to create the draft surface(s). Surface. 7. Mastercam displays the Chaining Methods menu. For more information. N for NURBS. which is calculated perpendicular to a selected view (You may need to rotate the geometry to see the arrow). 8. 4. Choose Do it to create the draft surface(s). Set the type of draft surface(s) to create. A direction arrow on the first selected chain reflects the current draft direction. see Surface types. Creating draft surfaces using a defined plane 1. To change the draft direction. Select one or more chains of curves (lines. 2. Use the Define Plane menu to define where the draft surface(s) terminate. The default draft angle is listed in the prompt area. 9. Choose Plane. or C for curve-generated. Create. Note: The default view is the current construction plane (Cplane). see Surface types. choose Curves. Toggle the Type option to P for parametric. or to exit the function. choose View. To create draft surfaces on additional curves. Mastercam displays the Draft Surface menu and lists the current menu settings in the prompt area. Mastercam displays a menu where you can select a new view. press [Esc]. Choose P for parametric. Note: Mastercam creates trimmed surfaces in cases where the plane is defined at an angle other than perpendicular with respect to the draft direction.7. then choose Done. Note: For additional information regarding surface types. Draft. To change this value. Toggle To plane to Y. choose Curves. Note: Mastercam creates a separate draft surface for each individual entity in each chain of curves. or to exit the function. or C for curvegenerated. Set the type of draft surface(s) to create. 5. 62 . Note: A zero value produces no tilt and is the equivalent of a perpendicular extrusion. then repeat steps 2 through 8. splines). then repeat steps 2 through 8. 9. Choose Main Menu. press [Esc]. 8. N for NURBS.

Click on the menu below for more information. draft angle. and position where the surface ends. 63 .The pictures below show an example of a draft surface: Draft Surface menu options The Draft Surface menu options define the following characteristics of the draft surfaces that you’re creating: draft direction. surface type.

Enter an Angle value. Choose Main Menu. Surface. 5. Select a curve-generated draft surface. then choose Done. Choose Main Menu. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. Create. 3. 64 . toggle it to Y. 3. 4. 5. Note: For more information about curve-generated surfaces. Press [Esc] to exit the function. arcs. Analyze. Choose Main Menu. 2. 2. then choose OK. see Surface types. Analyze. Note: For more information about curve-generated surfaces. Press [Esc] to exit the function. see Surface types.Editing the angle of a draft surface 1. Mastercam displays the Draft Surface menu and lists the current menu settings in the prompt area. Creating draft surfaces using a defined plane 1. Draft. 2. 4. then choose OK. Editing the length of a draft surface 1. Enter a 3D Length value. Mastercam displays the Chaining Methods menu. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. Select a curve-generated draft surface. toggle it to Y. Select one or more chains of curves (lines. splines).

which is calculated perpendicular to a selected view (You may need to rotate the geometry to see the arrow). After choosing either option. The default draft angle is listed in the prompt area. With the exception of extruded surface models. Choose Main Menu. Primitive. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. see Surface types. then enter a value between ±180° in the prompt area. then enter a value for length in the prompt area. 6. N for NURBS. 2. Choose Do it to create the draft surface(s). Set the type of draft surface(s) to create. Choose P for parametric.Note: Mastercam creates a separate draft surface for each individual entity in each chain of curves. To change the draft direction. choose Angle. choose View. To change this value. Click on the topics below for more information. choose Length. primitive surfaces are not based on curve geometry. 8. Creating a cylinder-shaped primitive surface model 1. You can access this menu by choosing Main Menu. you must enter a value in the prompt area. Toggle To plane to N. ¨ To set the cylinder’s orientation. Modify the surface model by setting parameters on the Cylinder menu as follows: ¨ To set the cylinder’s size. 7. 9. The Primitive Surfaces menu gives you options for creating different types of primitive surface models. Cylinder. or to exit the function. choose Axis. Create. choose Height and Radius. These models are fully closed and appear to be solid when shading is turned on. Mastercam displays a menu where you can select a new view. press [Alt+H]. 4. A direction arrow on the first selected chain reflects the current draft direction. or C for curvegenerated. For help on this menu. choose Curves. Surface. 5. press [Esc]. To create draft surfaces on additional curves. then repeat steps 2 through 8. Creating surfaces in pre-defined (primitive) shapes A primitive surface model is composed of one or more NURBS surfaces in a pre-defined shape. 3. Note: The default view is the current construction plane (Cplane). To change this length. Surface. such as a block or sphere. For more information. The default surface length is listed in the prompt area. Primitive. Next menu. Next menu. 65 . Note: A zero value produces no tilt and is the equivalent of a perpendicular extrusion. Create. Mastercam creates a cylindershaped surface model in the graphics window.

¨ To set the cone’s position. Note: By default. Use the Attributes menu to set the color and level of the surface model. enter a value for sweep angle. Cone. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. 3. the cylinder will be created using the main system color and level (Secondary menu) unless you use this option to set different attributes. Mastercam creates a coneshaped surface model in the graphics window. choose Attributes. and Taper angle. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them. Choose Main Menu. ¨ To set the cone’s orientation. Modify the surface model by setting parameters on the Cone menu as follows: ¨ To set the cone’s size. choose Base point. 2. Top radius. Next menu. choose Sweep angle. 66 . Primitive. choose Height. Note: You can create a partial cone by entering a value of less than 360 degrees.¨ To set the cylinder’s position. Use the Attributes menu to set the color and level of the surface model. Note: You can create a partial cylinder by entering a value of less than 360 degrees. enter a value for sweep angle. The Start angle parameter determines the angle at which Mastercam begins creating the cone. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the cylinder’s bottom face. Press [Esc] to finalize the creation of the cylinder. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the cone’s bottom face. 3. choose Attributes. Note: By default. choose Sweep angle. Creating a cone-shaped primitive surface model 1. the cone will be creating using the main system color and level (Secondary menu) unless you use this option to set different attributes. Create. Surface. In the prompt area. you must enter a value in the prompt area. In the prompt area. press [Alt+H]. choose Base point. ¨ To set the cylinder’s sweep. choose Axis. Btm radius. For help on this menu. Press [Esc] to finalize the creation of the cone. Mastercam creates each new surface model using the exact parameters as the previously created surface model of the same type. ¨ To set the cylinder’s attributes. ¨ To set the cone’s attributes. Note: If you create multiple primitive surface models of a given type. The Start angle parameter determines the angle at which Mastercam begins creating the cylinder. ¨ To set the cone’s sweep. After choosing any of these options.

choose Axis (H) and Axis (L). Width. choose Maj radius and Min radius. Block. Creating a torus-shaped primitive surface model 1. ¨ To set the block’s attributes. 2. For help on this menu. Choose Main Menu. Next menu. ¨ To set the orientation of the torus. Next menu. ¨ To set the block’s orientation. Primitive. Note: If you create multiple primitive surface models of a given type. 67 . ¨ To set the block’s position and 2D size in one step. Mastercam creates each new surface model using the exact parameters as the previously created surface model of the same type. Mastercam creates each new surface model using the exact parameters as the previously created surface model of the same type. choose Corners. After choosing either of these options. Primitive. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them Creating a block-shaped primitive surface model 1. and base point. Modify the surface model by setting parameters on the Block menu as follows: ¨ To set the block’s size. Create. Surface. width. choose Axis. Choose Main Menu. For help on this menu. you must enter a value in the prompt area. Torus. choose Base point. Use the Attributes menu to set the color and level of the surface model. Surface. The block’s height is unchanged. and Taper angle. you must enter a value in the prompt area. Mastercam creates a torus (doughnut)-shaped surface model in the graphics window. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the block’s bottom face. press [Alt+H].Note: If you create multiple primitive surface models of a given type. press [Alt+H]. ¨ To set the block’s position. Press [Esc] to finalize the creation of the block. Enter two points in the graphics window for opposing corners of the block’s bottom face. Mastercam updates length. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them. After choosing any of these option. 3. choose Attributes. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. Create. 2. choose Height. Mastercam creates a blockshaped surface model in the graphics window. Length. You can also choose Rotate to revolve the block about its base point by an angle value that you enter in the prompt area. Modify the surface model by setting parameters on the Torus menu as follows: ¨ To set the size of the torus. Note: By default. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axes that correspond to the block ’s height and length. the block will be created using the main system color and level (Secondary menu) unless you use this option to set different attributes.

Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the sphere. For help on this menu. Note: You can create a partial sphere by entering a value of less than 360 degrees. choose Sweep angle. The Start angle parameter determines the angle at which Mastercam begins creating the torus. Create. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. ¨ Modify the surface model by setting parameters on the Sphere menu as follows: To set the sphere’s size. Note: By default. the sphere will be creating using the main system color and level (Secondary menu) unless you use this option to set different attributes. Use the Attributes menu to set the color and level of the surface model. ¨ To set the sphere’s attributes. the of the torus will be creating using the main system color and level (Secondary menu) unless you use this option to set different attributes. Primitive. In the prompt area. Mastercam creates each new surface model using the exact parameters as the previously created surface model of the same type. Surface. Note: You can create a partial torus by entering a value of less than 360 degrees. enter a value for sweep angle. choose Sweep angle. Choose Main Menu. Sphere. Creating a sphere-shaped primitive surface model 1. Press [Esc] to finalize the creation of the torus. 3. ¨ To set the sphere’s orientation. ¨ To set the attributes of the torus. 68 . choose Radius. press [Alt+H]. 2. then enter a value for radius in the prompt area. Note: By default. ¨ To set the sphere’s position. The Start angle parameter determines the angle at which Mastercam begins creating the sphere.¨ To set the position of the torus. enter a value for sweep angle. choose Attributes. Note: If you create multiple primitive surface models of a given type. 3. choose Base point. Mastercam creates a sphereshaped surface model in the graphics window. choose Axis. Use the Attributes menu to set the color and level of the surface model. Press [Esc] to finalize the creation of the sphere. choose Base point. ¨ To set the sweep of the torus. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them. choose Attributes. In the prompt area. Next menu. ¨ To set the sphere’s sweep. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the torus’ hole.

Scale. choose Yes to close the chain of curves. ¨ To set the extrusion’s attributes. Modify the surface model by setting parameters on the Extrusion menu as follows: ¨ To set the extrusion’s size. ¨ To set the extrusion’s position. you must enter a value in the prompt area. Note: This functionality is similar to the Primitives function offered with the Mastercam Solids product. and Taper angle. Creating an extruded primitive surface model Mastercam creates an extruded primitive surface model by driving out the shape of a selected chain of curves in a perpendicular direction. Create. choose Base point. Extrusion Select one chain of curves. For help on this menu. it must be closed. Extracting surfaces from solids You can use solids to extract surface information. Mastercam drives the shape of the curves in a perpendicular direction to create the surface model. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam creates a separate NURBS surface for each solid face in your selection. If prompted. 1. Next menu. Surface. 4. Note: Choosing No cancels the selection and exits the function. Offset. Use the Attributes menu to set the color and level of the surface model. choose Attributes. Note: If you select a spline. which creates actual solid bodies. choose Height. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the extrusion’s bottom face. 5. 69 . press [Alt+H]. For more information. After choosing any of these options. choose Axis. Note: By default. 2. Press [Esc] to finalize the creation of the extruded surface model. see Creating solids in pre-defined (primitive) shapes. You can also choose Rotate to revolve the extrusion about its base point by an angle value that you enter in the prompt area.Note: If you create multiple primitive surface models of a given type. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. Mastercam closes the chain by drawing a straight line between the two open endpoints. ¨ To set the extrusion’s orientation. Mastercam creates each new surface model using the exact parameters as the previously created surface model of the same type. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them. the extrusion will be created using the main system color and level (Secondary menu) unless you use this option to set different attributes. Primitive. 3.

Fillet. Select one or more surfaces. Creating a fillet surface between a curve and a surface This option creates one or more fillet surfaces. enter a value for the radius of the fillet surfaces. Choose Main Menu. lies on a curve or chain of curves at a rail location. Choose Flip to reverse the direction of the plane’s normal arrow. In the prompt area. Create. In the prompt area. if necessary. press [Alt+H]. 1. 70 . then choose Done to extract the surfaces. Surface. Create. Surface. 5. A fillet surface is mathematically equivalent to a series of arcs and is tangent to one or two surfaces. 3. then choose Done. then choose Done. Fillet. 3. 6. 2. 1. Choose Main Menu. each of which is tangent to a plane and a surface. Curve/surf. Creating a fillet surface between a plane and a surface This option creates one or more fillet surfaces. Fillet. From solid. Note: For help on the Plane/Surface menu options. Create.1. 4. enter a value for radius. The Define Plane menu displays. each of which has a defined radius. then choose OK to set the direction. as needed. and is tangent to one or more selected surfaces. Create. Surface. Select one or more faces and/or whole solid bodies. Set parameters on the Plane/Surface menu. Select one or more surfaces. The solids are unchanged. Note: The radius that you enter should be an average representation of the variable radii that you enter if you vary the radius along the surface in the following step. You can access the Fillet menu by choosing Main Menu. Note: The arrow points to the side of the plane that you want the fillet surfaces to be tangent to. Next menu. Define the tangent plane. then choose Do it to create the fillet surfaces. Plane/surf. 2. Modify functions Creating fillet surfaces The Fillet menu gives you options for constructing fillet surfaces. Surface. 2. Choose Main Menu. based on how it is constructed.

Surf/surf. the system attempts to create fillet surfaces by pairing each surface in the set with every other surface in the set. With one set. the system looks for intersections only between each wall and the floor. 71 . 5. then choose Done. Set parameters on the Surface/Surface Fillet Surface menu. 6. If. each of which is tangent to two surfaces. 2. then choose Done. press [Alt+H]. it creates the offset surface as a separate surface from the original surface. Select one or more surfaces for the first set of surfaces. When you choose this option. Note: The radius that you enter should be an average representation of the variable radii that you enter if you vary the radius along the surface in the following step. Surface. then choose Do it to create the fillet surfaces. select the surfaces to delete. For example. In the prompt area. If prompted. Set parameters on the Curve/Surface Fillet Surface menu. Select one or more surfaces for the second set of surfaces. When Mastercam offsets a surface. Select one or more chains of curves. Note: For help on the Curve/Surface menu options. Note: You receive this prompt only if you selected the Fillet Both Sides check box on the Surface-Surface Fillet dialog box and the system finds more than one solution. Choose Main Menu. press [Alt+H]. then choose Do it to create the fillet surfaces.4. The system attempts to create fillet surfaces by pairing each surface in the first set with each surface in the second set. 5. 3. Choose Main Menu. the system looks for intersections between all walls and the floor. Creating a fillet surface between two surfaces This option creates one or more fillet surfaces. Offset. 1. Note: For help on the Surface/Surface menu options. if you have multiple surface walls and a single surface floor all in a single set. In some cases. Fillet. You can select one set. you select the walls as one set of surfaces and the floor as the second set of surfaces. Create. Offsetting surfaces This function offsets one or more surfaces by a distance and a direction relative to the surface normal direction of each selected surface. however. 6. 4. 1. Surface. enter a value for radius. Indicate which side of the curves to use to create the fillet surfaces by choosing Left or Right with relation to the direction of the curve. Create. having only one set of surfaces could prove more time consuming. then choose Done. then press [Esc] to exit the function. the system prompts you to select two sets of surfaces. but it must contain at least two surfaces.

3. Modify. choose Check norms. 2. Choose Main Menu. then select one or more surface curves in the graphics window. Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method. Trim/extend. Trimming surfaces The Trim or Extend Surface menu gives you options for trimming. then choose Done. 1. or D to delete the surfaces. Mastercam displays the Offset menu. Mastercam projects them onto the surfaces in order to calculate the intersection where the surface will be trimmed. choose Offset dist. Choose Do it to create the offset surfaces. You can check the normal direction of one or all surfaces in the selection. However. untrimming. enter a new value for the distance to offset the surfaces. Set the remaining parameters on the Trim to Curves menu. Note: You can enter a positive or negative value. Trimming surfaces to curves This function trims surfaces to curves (lines. 3. Surface. Select a curve or chains of curves to use to trim the surfaces. The default offset values display in the prompt area. Click on the topics below for more information. Modify. 72 . Indicate what to do with the original surfaces once the offset surfaces have been created. 4. but it may take longer to calculate the trimmed surfaces than Fixed step. When Mastercam trims a surface. In the prompt area. then choose Do it. arcs. Choose Options. Select one or more surfaces to trim. then choose Done. then choose OK. Create. then choose Done. Trim. and extending surfaces. blank. You can access the Trim or Extend menu by choosing Main Menu. Mastercam displays the Check Surface Normals menu. Set the step method and trimming parameters. To change the offset distance. and you can keep. 4. To check the surface normal directions. Note: To trim the surfaces to surface curves instead of using the trimming curves selected in step 3.2. Surface or by choosing Main Menu. For more information. Toggle Dispose to K to keep the surfaces. choose Surf crvs. if necessary. 5. and/or splines as the trimming curves in this step. A negative value offsets the surfaces in the negative surface normal direction. or delete the original (base) surface. To curves. Note: You must select lines. A positive value offsets the surfaces in the positive surface normal direction. press [Alt+H] from the menu. Trim. it creates the trimmed surface as a new surface. 5. arcs. and splines or surface curves) If the trimming curves do not lie directly on the surfaces. 6. Surface. Select one or more surfaces to offset. you can replace these trimming curves with surface curves in step 5. B to blank the surfaces.

8. When Mastercam trims a surface. Define the trimming plane. ¨ ¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. Choose Main Menu. Curve. Trim/extend. Trimming surfaces to a plane This function trims surfaces to a plane. and you can keep. The arrow on the graphic indicates the side that Mastercam will keep after trimming. 1. Note: Avoid selecting the outer boundary of the surface. it creates the trimmed surface as a new surface. then click. Create. Select a highlighted surface. Choose Flip to reverse the direction of the arrow. 7.6. Surface. The following graphics show a surface trimmed by a circle. in this function no curves are created. or delete the original (base) surface. 4. Move the base of the arrow to the area of the surface to keep after trimming. Notes: ¨ This function is similar to the Create. which may produce unintended results. To plane. Modify. Press [Esc] to exit the function. blank. Select one or more surfaces to trim. 2. then choose OK. 73 . Surface. Mastercam displays an arrow on the surface. To curves. Trim. Mastercam displays a temporary graphic of the plane in the graphics window. Take one of the following actions: ¨ ¨ Choose OK to keep the side that the arrow currently points to. However. which gives you the option to trim surfaces to projected curves. 3. Project function. then choose Done.

Surface. 74 . Trimming surfaces to surfaces This function looks for intersections between two sets of surfaces. and trims one or both of the sets of surfaces. then choose Done. in this function no curves are created. Notes: ¨ This function is similar to the Create. Select one or more surfaces for the first set of surfaces.5. then choose OK. Create. ¨ ¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. To surfaces. but it may take longer to calculate the trimmed surfaces than Fixed step. Surface. The following graphics show a rectangular surface trimmed to a plane. Choose Options. However. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Choose Do it to trim the surfaces. To plane. 1. When Mastercam trims a surface. 2. which gives you the option to trim surfaces to a plane. it creates the trimmed surface as a new surface. Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method. blank. Trim. 6. one of which must contain only one surface. or delete the original (base) surface. Slice function. Modify. Set the step method and trimming parameters. and you can keep. Curve. 7. Choose Main Menu. Trim/extend.

then choose Done. select a surface from the first set. Surface. 6. 75 . Trim/extend. select a surface from the first set. Move the base of the arrow to the area of the surface to keep after trimming. in this function no curves are created. To surfaces. 5. then click. Select one or more surfaces for the second set of surfaces. ¨ If in step 4 you chose to trim both sets of surfaces. Move the base of the arrow to the area of the surface to keep after trimming. then take one of the following actions: ¨ If in step 4 you chose to trim only the first set of surfaces. you must select only one surface in this step. Notes: ¨ Mastercam trims the surfaces based on the section of the selected surface(s) that you keep in step 5. then click. Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method. which gives you the option to trim two sets of surfaces to their intersections. Choose Do it. ¨ This function is similar to the Create. which may produce unintended results. 4. Curve. select a surface from the second set. then choose OK. Create. Intersect function. If you do not get the trimming results you want on a particular surface. Note: Avoid selecting the outer boundary of the surface. then click. Note: If you selected more than one surface in step 2. but it may take longer to calculate the trimmed surfaces than Fixed step. ¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. Move the base of the arrow to the area of the surface to keep after trimming. Repeat for a surface from the second set. Set the step method and trimming parameters.3. However. ¨ If in step 4 you chose to trim only the second set of surfaces. try performing the function on it separately from the other surfaces. ¨ The following graphics show one surface trimmed to its intersection with another surface. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Choose Options.

Set the step method. 6. Surface. Surface. Nested chains form holes in the flat boundary surface. Additional chains must be nested within this boundary. 5. which defines the outer boundary of the surface. it creates and blanks an untrimmed base (parent) surface. Trim. Notes: ¨ If selecting multiple chains. If you selected any open chains in step 3. 2. Use the chaining methods on the Flat Boundary menu to select one or more planar chains of curves. Mastercam calculates (but does not create) a curve between the two open endpoints for the purpose of defining the closed boundary. ¨ You can use the Manual chaining method to select surface edges and surface curves. Flat bndy. Create. then choose OK. there must be one outermost chain. Choose Yes to close the chains or No to remove the open chains from calculation of the trimmed surface. When Mastercam trims a surface to the boundary. 4.Creating a trimmed surface within a flat boundary This function creates a trimmed NURBS surface within a flat boundary defined by chain(s) of curves or surface edges. 76 . 1. Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method. Mastercam displays the message shown below. For information on manual chaining. Note: If you choose Yes. Notes: ¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. see Manual chaining. Trim/extend. Flat bndy. but it may take longer to calculate the trimmed surfaces than Fixed step. 3. Modify. Choose Do it to create the flat boundary surface. Choose Options. Choose Main Menu. Choose Done to return to the Flat Boundary menu.

it creates two trimmed surfaces and blanks the original surface. Press [Esc] to exit the function. The flat boundary surface has two holes from the nested chains. Split. Choose Main Menu. 77 .¨ The following graphics show the resulting surface when all three chains are selected. move the cursor crosshairs over the point. Modify. Modify. Move the base of the arrow to the position you want the split to pass through on the surface (the fixed position). 4. When the system breaks the selected surface. then click. ¨ Choose Main Menu. Splitting a surface into two trimmed surfaces This function breaks a surface at a fixed position along one of the surface directions. Trim/extend. Trim. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to split additional surfaces. then click. Select a surface in the graphics window. Note: You may need to rotate the geometry to bring the arrow into view. 3. 2. Choose OK to split the surface along the current direction (reflected by the arrow on the surface) or choose Flip to reverse the direction before choosing OK. Surface. Surface. 5. Untrim. 6. type [S] to activate snapping. 2. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. Create. Untrimming a surface 1. Take one of the following actions: To untrim a surface by deleting it and unblanking its untrimmed base surface. Trim. Split. set Dispose to D. Note: You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. 1. Surface. Note: To enter a point at the position of an existing point.

Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Note: If you selected an external trimmed boundary. Trim/extend. For each hole that you select to fill. you may need to switch to isometric view (Gview. 4. 78 . Repeat steps 2 through 4 to remove trimmed boundaries from additional surfaces. You do not receive this prompt. Select a trimmed surface in the graphics window. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to untrim additional surfaces. Untrim. Mastercam closes the hole by removing the trimmed boundary. 3. Mastercam closes the hole by removing the boundary. 5. You can fill internal holes (those that lie completely within the outer boundary of the surface) and external holes (those that lie along the outer boundary of the surface). Mastercam closes it by removing the trimmed surface and replacing it with the untrimmed base surface. ¨ To return a base surface to the graphics window and blank the trimmed surface. Mastercam returns its base surface to the graphics window and disposes of the trimmed surface according to the selection made in step 2. Create.¨ To return a base surface to the graphics window and keep the trimmed surface visible in the graphics window. Slide the base of the arrow to a trimmed boundary that you want to fill. Isometric). Trim. Choose Main Menu. or No to fill only the selected hole. Removing a trimmed boundary from a surface The Remove Boundary function lets you fill holes in a trimmed surface. Modify. 5. Note: To see the arrow. Select a trimmed surface in the graphics window. Mastercam displays the following prompt: Choose Yes to fill all of the internal holes. Remove bndy. Surface. then left-click. If you selected an internal boundary (hole) and the surface contains multiple internal boundaries. 2. set Dispose to B. 1. or press [Esc] to exit the function. 3. If the trimmed surface contains only one hole. Surface. Note: You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. 4. set Dispose to K.

For more information. Create. Surface. Trim/extend. the hole that gets filled is defined as the space between the trimmed and the untrimmed boundaries. This condition is true for all flat boundary surfaces because the base surface of a flat boundary surface always extends beyond the outer boundary of the flat boundary surface. 79 . see the related topics below. no trimmed boundaries are removed. as shown in the following example. ¨ If you select the outer boundary of a trimmed surface and that boundary does not touch the outer boundary of the untrimmed base surface (regardless of whether the base surface is currently displayed or is blanked). ¨ This function differs from the Fill Holes function in which Mastercam creates trimmed surfaces to fill the holes. as shown in the following example. the hole that gets filled is defined as the space between the trimmed and the untrimmed boundaries but only along the selected trimmed edge until it reaches the untrimmed boundary. Remove bndy.Notes: ¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. ¨ If you select the outer boundary of a trimmed surface and that boundary does touch the outer boundary of the untrimmed base surface (regardless of whether the base surface is currently displayed or is blanked).

or press [Esc] to exit the function. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. You can fill internal holes (those that lie completely within the outer boundary of the surface) and external holes (those that lie along the trimmed outer boundary of the surface). Trim. 80 . 5. Slide the base of the arrow to a trimmed boundary that you want to fill. then left-click. or No to fill only the selected hole. 4. You do not receive this prompt. Mastercam displays the following prompt: Choose Yes to fill all of the internal holes. Note: To see the arrow. Modify. Choose Main Menu. Surface. Fill holes. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to fill holes in additional surfaces. If you selected an internal boundary (hole) and the surface contains multiple internal boundaries. 2. Mastercam creates a trimmed surface within the boundary defined by the hole. Isometric). Note: If you selected an external trimmed boundary. Select a trimmed surface in the graphics window. 3. For each hole that you select to fill. 1. Mastercam closes the hole by creating a trimmed surface within it. you may need to switch to isometric view (Gview.Filling a trimmed boundary in a surface The Fill Holes function lets you fill holes in a trimmed surface.

81 . as shown in the following example. Create. the hole that gets filled is defined as the space between the trimmed and the untrimmed boundaries. ¨ This function differs from the Remove Boundary function in which Mastercam removes the trimmed boundaries but nothing new is created. see the related topics below. For more information. Trim/extend. This condition is true for all flat boundary surfaces because the base surface of a flat boundary surface always extends beyond the outer boundary of the flat boundary surface. the hole that gets filled is defined as the space between the trimmed and the untrimmed boundaries but only along the selected trimmed edge until it reaches the untrimmed boundary. ¨ If you select the outer boundary of a trimmed surface and that boundary does touch the outer boundary of the untrimmed base surface (regardless of whether the base surface is currently displayed or is blanked). ¨ If you select the outer boundary of a trimmed surface and that boundary does not touch the outer boundary of the untrimmed base surface (regardless of whether the base surface is currently displayed or is blanked). Surface.Notes: ¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. as shown in the following example. Fill holes.

8. 1. Note: You can perform this step repeatedly to extend the surface incrementally by the defined length. 5. blank. or delete the original surface. 10. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. NURBS. Mastercam creates the extended surface using the same surface type (parametric. You can extend the surface linearly or following the curvature of the surface. Choosing No tells the system not to extend the surface. 3. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Choosing Yes tells the system to create a NURBS approximation of the surface. Choose Do it to extend the surface. Surface. Choose Length. Notes: ¨ ¨ You can extend trimmed surfaces only along untrimmed edges. You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. 7. Surface.Extending a surface by a defined length This function extends a surface by a defined length. Set other parameters on the Extend Surface menu. Set Linear to Y to extend the surface linearly or to N to extend the surface according to the curvature of the surface. Set To plane to N. it creates the extended surface as a new surface. In the prompt area. Create. 82 . 2. you cannot extend curve-generated surfaces linearly and have them remain curvegenerated. Note: This step is not necessary if Linear is set to N. For example. 6. or curve-generated) as the original surface. Trim/extend. Modify. In such cases. the system cannot extend all surfaces precisely. Move the base of the arrow to the edge to extend. Extend. Mastercam displays the prompt shown below. However. 4. Repeat steps 5 through 7 to extend additional surfaces. Extend. then click. 9. When Mastercam extends a surface. ¨ When possible. and you can choose to keep. Choose Main Menu. Select a surface in the graphics window. as needed. enter the length to extend the surface.

Choose Plane. Create. Set Linear to Y. For example.Extending a surface to a plane This function extends a surface linearly to a defined plane. or delete the original surface. or curve-generated) as the original surface. Extend. Choosing Yes tells the system to create a NURBS approximation of the surface. blank. 2. Choosing No tells the system not to extend the surface. then click. Trim/extend. You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. 4. Surface. Move the base of the arrow to the edge to extend. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. Choose Do it to extend the surface. Modify. Mastercam displays the prompt shown below. 8. the system cannot extend all surfaces precisely. Notes: ¨ ¨ You can extend trimmed surfaces only along untrimmed edges. When Mastercam extends a surface. you cannot extend curve-generated surfaces linearly and have them remain curvegenerated. 6. However. and you can choose to keep. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 1. Use the Define Plane menu to define the plane to extend the surface to. Set To plane to Y. and you can choose to keep. 5. 9. In such cases. 7. 3. as needed. Select a surface in the graphics window. it creates the extended surface as a new surface. Choose Main Menu. blank. When Mastercam extends a surface. NURBS. or delete the original surface. ¨ When possible. Mastercam creates the extended surface using the same surface type (parametric. 83 . Extend. it creates the extended surface as a new surface. Set other parameters on the Extend Surface menu. Extending a surface by a defined length This function extends a surface by a defined length. Surface. You can extend the surface linearly or following the curvature of the surface.

Surface. Note: This step is not necessary if Linear is set to N. 84 . Extend. Use the Define Plane menu to define the plane to extend the surface to. Surface. you cannot extend curve-generated surfaces linearly and have them remain curvegenerated. and you can choose to keep. Notes: ¨ ¨ You can extend trimmed surfaces only along untrimmed edges. the system cannot extend all surfaces precisely. Set Linear to Y. NURBS. blank. In the prompt area. You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. Extend. Move the base of the arrow to the edge to extend. or curve-generated) as the original surface. 4. Choosing Yes tells the system to create a NURBS approximation of the surface. Select a surface in the graphics window. Extend. Modify. 1. or delete the original surface. 4. Create. 7. 3. enter the length to extend the surface. Set To plane to N.1. then click. Trim/extend. Set To plane to Y. Extending a surface to a plane This function extends a surface linearly to a defined plane. 9. Modify. Set other parameters on the Extend Surface menu. When Mastercam extends a surface. However. ¨ When possible. 2. Note: You can perform this step repeatedly to extend the surface incrementally by the defined length. 3. Set Linear to Y to extend the surface linearly or to N to extend the surface according to the curvature of the surface. For example. it creates the extended surface as a new surface. In such cases. 6. 10. Choose Do it to extend the surface. Repeat steps 5 through 7 to extend additional surfaces. Choosing No tells the system not to extend the surface. 5. as needed. Choose Length. Mastercam displays the prompt shown below. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. Choose Plane. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Mastercam creates the extended surface using the same surface type (parametric. Choose Main Menu. 2. Choose Main Menu. Surface. 8.

then click to set the blend location. 7. 2. see Blend direction example. the system cannot extend all surfaces precisely. 5. or curve-generated) as the original surface. 1. Note: For an example of how the blend direction affects the resulting surface. 85 . Choose Do it to extend the surface. ¨ When possible. if necessary. Mastercam creates the extended surface using the same surface type (parametric. 3. This function is useful for eliminating unwanted features in order to smooth out part of a surface model. then click. Choosing No tells the system not to extend the surface. then choose Do it to create the blend surface. Trim/extend. as needed. Notes: ¨ ¨ Set other parameters on the Extend Surface menu. Create. Move the base of the arrow to the edge to extend. NURBS. Note: To select a blend location at an existing point. Mastercam creates a temporary blending spline on the surface. You can extend trimmed surfaces only along untrimmed edges. Mastercam creates a temporary surface between the two blending splines and displays the 2 Surface Blending menu. Mastercam displays the prompt shown below. then left-click. Move the base of the arrow over the desired point. Choosing Yes tells the system to create a NURBS approximation of the surface. 8. 6.5. 4. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. you cannot extend curve-generated surfaces linearly and have them remain curvegenerated. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Create. 9. Extend. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for a second surface. Surface. Choose Flip to reverse the blend direction. For example. Choose Main Menu. as needed. Define the location and width of the tangent surface: Move the base of the arrow to the location where you want to blend the new surface to the existing surface. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. 6. Surface. Set parameters on the 2 Surface Blending menu. Select a surface in the graphics window. Blending two surfaces Mastercam blends two surfaces by creating a third surface that is tangent to the first two surfaces. 2 surf blnd. Select a surface. press [Alt+H]. type [S] to activate snapping. Next menu. Note: To receive help on the menu options. then choose OK to set the direction. In such cases. You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. However.

3. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for two additional surfaces. ¨ Toggle Trim. This function is useful for rounding the corners of a filleted "box. as needed. Set parameters on the 3 Surface Blending menu. Surface. Select a surface. then click to set the blend location." It is similar to blending three surfaces. If the Sides parameter is set to 3. 3 surf blnd. 2. Next menu. Mastercam creates a temporary blending spline on the surface. and Edge spl to new settings. 2. as well as whether the resulting surfaces are trimmed or untrimmed. Fillet blnd. Create. type [S] to activate snapping. Surface. press [Alt+H]. Choose Main Menu. Next menu. as needed. Note: For an example of how the blend direction affects the resulting surface. Blending three intersecting fillet surfaces Mastercam blends three intersecting fillet surfaces by creating one or more surfaces that are tangent to the first three surfaces. 1. as needed. Note: To receive help on the menu options. see Blend direction example. see Adjusting the boundaries of a fillet blend surface. Create. Choose Main Menu. with this option Mastercam automatically calculates the location where the blend surface(s) are tangent to the fillet surfaces.Blending three surfaces Mastercam blends three surfaces by creating a fourth surface that is tangent to the first three surfaces. 86 . then left-click. Set parameters on the 3 Fillet Blend menu. Mastercam creates a temporary surface between the three blending splines and displays the 3 Surface Blending menu. then select three fillet surfaces. Choose Flip to reverse the blend direction. then choose Do it to create the blend surface. This function is useful for eliminating unwanted features in order to smooth out part of a surface model. However. 1. Mastercam creates a three-sided blend surface. Move the base of the arrow over the desired point. For more information. if necessary. Define the location and width of the tangent surface: Move the base of the arrow to the location where you want to blend the new surface to the existing surface. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. Otherwise. Note: The selected geometry determines the number of surfaces that the system creates. Dispose. 5. 4. take one of the following actions: ¨ Manually adjust one or more of the boundaries. Note: To select a blend location at an existing point. 6. then choose OK to set the direction.

Entity association occurs between the following entities: ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ Between curve-generated surfaces and their reference curves Between offset surfaces and their generating surfaces Between trimmed surfaces and their generating (base) surfaces Between surface curves and the surfaces on which they lie Surface types Mastercam lets you create three types of surfaces: parametric. and curve-generated. However. In addition. However. Parametric The parametric method of storing surface information is analogous to the parametric method of storing spline information." which depends on the parent for its definition. Swept. To understand the relationship between dependent entities. However. or generating. you can choose only Parametric and NURBS. and Blend surfaces. you can choose from all three surface types. entity or entities as the "parent" and the resultant. A patch is an area of the surface bounded by four segments of generating curves. 3. think of the original. but with slightly more computing time Compatible with IGES conversion 87 Compatible with IGES and VDA conversions Not associated with their generating curves Require a large amount of data storage . Surface options. or generated. a NURBS surface expands the string of control points in a second direction resulting in a grid. NURBS surfaces have the following characteristics: ¨ ¨ Require less data storage than parametric surfaces. For most Create. for Coons. entity as the "child. NURBS. Choose Do it to create the six-sided fillet blend surface. a parametric surface expands each curve segment in a second direction resulting in a patch. Surface associativity Entity association refers to the dependent relationship between one entity and a second entity or group of entities from which the first entity is generated. parametric surfaces have the following characteristics: ¨ ¨ ¨ NURBS The NURBS method of storing surface information is analogous to the NURBS method of storing spline information.¨ Choose Select to toggle Sides to a new setting and/or reselect the three fillet surfaces that you want to blend. In addition. Each type describes a method that the system uses to calculate and store mathematical data about the surface. Each surface type is described below.

it stores a direct reference back to the original curves. curve-generated surfaces have the following characteristics: ¨ ¨ Require less data storage than parametric or NURBS surfaces Associated with their generating curves Note: Curve-generated surfaces store exact data about their generating curves (rather than approximations). also the surfaces defined from them. 1. You can analyze a surface to determine if it is bicubic. The System Configuration dialog box opens. also the surfaces defined from them. Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box. Curve-generated or NURBS if curve generation is not permitted. 4. Select the default spline and surface type from the Spline/Surface creation type drop down menu. ¨ ¨ Curve-generated or parametric if curve generation is not permitted. 2. 3. The options are: ¨ Parametric – curves defined by coefficients or nodes. Specifying spline and surface type defaults The CAD Settings tab of the System Configuration dialog box lets you specify the type of spline or surface Mastercam will create by default whenever you create a spline or surface. you can also select a type at the time you create the spline or surface. 88 . Choose the CAD Settings tab. Configure. ¨ NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline) – curves defined by knots or control points. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. While these types will be generated by default. Converters function can be output to VDA only if they are bicubic (mathematical degree 3 by 3). Screen.¨ Can be output to VDA file format (if created in Mastercam) Note: Due to limitations with the VDA file format. Do one of the following: Enter or choose other defaults. surfaces that you bring in from another source using the File. ¨ Not associated with their generating curves Curve-generated When the system stores a surface as a curve-generated surface. In addition. See Surface types for more information on surface types.

Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. move the cursor crosshairs over the point. Move the base of the arrow to the position you want the curve to pass through on the surface (the fixed position). then click. Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method. You can access this menu by choosing Main Menu. then choose OK. Note: You can choose Flip to reverse the current direction before choosing OK. Choose No to use the settings only for the current Mastercam session. Screen. 3. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. 89 . Creating constant parameter curves on a surface You can create a curve in one or both surface directions at a fixed position (constant parameter) on the surface. ¨ box. Create. Choose OK to create a curve in the current direction (reflected by the arrow on the selected surface) or Both to create a curve in both directions. You can access the Surface Display menu by choosing Main Menu. arcs. Const param. Creating curves on surfaces and solids The Curve menu gives you options for creating lines. splines on surfaces and solids and for creating surface curves on surfaces. Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog Setting the display of surfaces and solids The Surface Display menu gives you options for specifying how surfaces and solids appear in the graphics window. 1. 6. Create. Surf disp. and Density) are shown in the prompt area. 4. Back color. then click. Click on the topics below for more information. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional curves. Curve. Note: You may need to rotate the geometry to bring the arrow into view. Choose Main Menu. but it may take longer to calculate the curves than other step methods. Note: To enter a point at the position of an existing point. Select a step method and set the types of curves to create. While this menu is displayed. type [S] to activate snapping. 5. Choose Options. Curve. 2. current surface display settings (Show back. Select a surface in the graphics window.

Note: You can choose Flip to reverse the current direction before choosing OK. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 7. Choose Main Menu. face.7. Note: To enter a point at the position of an existing point. 2. then check Splines and select a spline type. Note: An easy way to visualize the directions of a surface or solid face is to look at its wireframe display. 6. move the cursor crosshairs over the point. 3. Choose OK to create a curve in the current direction (reflected by the arrow on the selected face) or Both to create a curve in both directions. Choose Options. Creating constant parameter curves on a solid face You can create a curve in one or both solid face directions at a fixed position (constant parameter) on the face. 4. Choose OK. but it may take longer to calculate the curves than other step methods. Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method. Create. 5. then click. Curve. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the solid Note: You may need to rotate the geometry to bring the arrow into view. Select a solid face in the graphics window. then click. type [S] to activate snapping. Const param. The red lines represent the two constant parameter curves created on the surface. 1. one in each direction. The point where the constant parameter curves intersect is the fixed position. Select a step method. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to create additional curves. 90 . or constant parameter. Choose Solid face. the green lines represent the wireframe display of a surface. Move the base of the arrow to the position you want the curve to pass through on the solid face (the fixed position). In the following example.

8.

Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: An easy way to visualize the directions of a surface or solid face is to look at its wireframe display. In the following example, the green lines represent the wireframe display of a surface. The red lines represent the two constant parameter curves created on the surface, one in each direction. The point where the constant parameter curves intersect is the fixed position, or constant parameter.

Creating parametric splines along the patch boundaries of a parametric surface 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Patch bndy. Select a parametric surface. Mastercam creates parametric splines along the patch boundaries. Repeat step 2 to create splines along the patch boundaries of additional surfaces. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: This function does not work with bicubic (degree 3, or order 4) parametric surfaces, such as those created with the Create, Rectangle function.

Creating flowline curves on a surface This function creates multiple curves on a surface in one direction of the surface. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Flowline. Select a surface in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the surface.

3. Select the curve direction: Choose OK to accept the current direction or choose Flip to reverse the direction, then choose OK. 4. The prompt area reflects the current method used to calculate the number of curves that Mastercam will create on the surface. To change the calculation method, choose Number, Dist(ance), or Toler(ance), then enter a value in the prompt area. 5. Choose Options. Select a step method and set the types of curves to create, then choose OK.

91

Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method, but it may take longer to calculate the curves than other step methods. 6. 7. 8. Choose Do it to create the curves. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to create additional curves. Press [Esc] to exit the option.

Note: An easy way to visualize the directions of a surface or solid face is to look at its wireframe display. In the following examples, the green lines represent the wireframe display of a surface. The red lines represent flowline curves created on the surface in different directions.

Creating flowline curves on a solid face

This function creates multiple curves on a solid face in one direction of the solid face. 1. 2. 3. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Flowline. Choose Solid face. Select a solid face in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the face.

4. Select the curve direction: Choose OK to accept the current direction or choose Flip to reverse the direction, then choose OK. 5. The prompt area reflects the current method used to calculate the number of curves that Mastercam will create on the surface. To change the calculation method, choose Number, Dist(ance), or Toler(ance), then enter a value in the prompt area. 6. Choose Options. Select a step method, then check Splines and select a spline type. Choose OK.

92

Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method, but it may take longer to calculate the curves than other step methods. 7. 8. 9. Choose Do it to create the curves Repeat steps 2 through 7 to create additional curves. Press [Esc] to exit the option.

Note: An easy way to visualize the directions of a surface or solid face is to look at its wireframe display. In the following examples, the green lines represent the wireframe display of a surface. The red lines represent flowline curves created on the surface in different directions. Creating a curve at any position on a surface 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Dynamic. Choose Options. Set the type of entities to create, then choose OK. Select a surface in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. Move the base of the arrow to position the first endpoint of the curve on the surface, then click.

Note: To set the endpoint at the position of an existing point entity, type [S] to activate snapping, move the cursor crosshairs over the point, then click. 5. Repeat step 4 to enter additional points through which you want the curve to pass.

Note: The resulting curve passes through the points in the order you enter them. You must enter a minimum of two points, one for each endpoint of the curve. 6. 7. 8. Notes: ¨ If you choose to create a spline in step 2, the points that you enter in steps 4 and 5 represent nodes where the spline lies directly on the surface. ¨ If you choose to create a surface curve in step 2, it lies completely on the surface. Creating a spline at any position on a solid face 1. 2. 3. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Dynamic. Choose Options. Check Splines, select a spline type, then choose OK. Choose Solid face. 93 Press [Esc] to create the curve. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to create additional curves. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

4. 5.

Select a solid face in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the face. Move the base of the arrow to position the first endpoint of the spline on the face, then click.

Note: To set the endpoint at the position of an existing point entity, type [S] to activate snapping, move the cursor crosshairs over the point, then click. 6. Repeat step 5 to enter additional points through which you want the spline to pass.

Note: The resulting spline passes through the points in the order you enter them. You must enter a minimum of two points, one for each endpoint of the spline. 7. 8. 9. Press [Esc] to create the spline and exit the function. Repeat steps 3 through 7 to create additional splines. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: The points that you enter in steps 5 and 6 represent nodes where the resulting spline lies directly on the solid face.

Creating curves at the intersections of a slice plane with surfaces and solids This function slices selected surfaces and solids with a plane and creates curves along the intersections of the plane with the selected entities. You also have options to create the curves at offset positions, to create curves at a defined spacing interval from the intersections, and to trim the surfaces to the resulting curves. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Slice. Select one or more surfaces, solids, and/or solid faces, then choose Done.

3. Define the slice plane. Mastercam displays a temporary graphic of the plane in the graphics window. 4. Set parameters on the Slice Curve menu, then choose Do it to create the curves.

Note: Choose Options to access additional parameters. 5. If prompted, select a highlighted surface to trim. Move the base of the arrow to the side of the surface that you want to keep after trimming, then click. 6. Note: ¨ If trimming is active, Mastercam trims all of the selected surfaces based on the selection you make in step 5. If you do not get the trimming results you want on a particular surface, try performing the function on it separately from the other surfaces. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

94

¨ The first graphic shows a selected surface and the slice plane that intersects it. The second graphic shows the resulting curve (red) on the surface, which has been trimmed back to the curve.

Creating curves at the intersections of two sets of surfaces and solids This function creates curves at the intersections between two sets of surfaces and solids. Mastercam pairs each entity in the first set with each entity in the second set and creates curves at the intersecting locations. 1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Intersect.

2. Select one or more surfaces, solids, and/or solid faces for the first set of entities, then choose Done. Note: You can select solids and solid faces in the first set only. 3. 4. Select one or more surfaces for the second set of entities, then choose Done. Set parameters on the Intersection Curve menu, then choose Do it to create the curves.

Note: Choose Options to access additional parameters. 5. If prompted, select a highlighted surface to trim. Move the base of the arrow to the side of the surface that you want to keep after trimming, then click. If prompted again, repeat for a second surface. 95

For example. having only one set of surfaces could prove more time consuming.6. if you have multiple surface walls and a single surface floor in one set. ¨ The first graphic shows two shaded intersecting surfaces. 96 . ¨ If you choose to create surface curves. Notes: Press [Esc] to exit the function. ¨ If you choose to intersect only surfaces. The red lines are the curves that were created along the surface intersections. In certain instances. you select the walls as one set of surfaces and the floor as the second set of surfaces. however. however. ¨ In order to trim surfaces to the intersection curves. If you do not get the trimming results you want on a particular surface. you may select them in one set containing a minimum of two surfaces. Mastercam trims both sets of surfaces based on the selections you make in step 5. Mastercam creates two surface curves for each intersection. ¨ If trimming is active. Mastercam attempts to create curves by pairing each surface in the set with every other surface in the set. the system looks for intersections between all walls and the floor. you must select two sets of surfaces and one set must contain only one surface. try performing the function on it separately from the other surfaces. If. In this case. the system looks for intersections only between each wall and the floor. one on each of the intersecting surfaces. The second graphic shows the same surfaces in wireframe view.

Choose Main Menu. Notes: ¨ If trimming is active. Note: Choose Options to access additional parameters. the green circle has been projected onto the surface. 3. 2. Create. Select one or more surfaces. 6. Project. Part line. 97 . Creating parting line curves on surfaces and solids 1. then choose Done. Choose View. If you do not get the trimming results you want on a particular surface. ¨ In the following graphic. then click. Move the base of the arrow to the side of the surface that you want to keep after trimming. Curve. Mastercam trims all of the selected surfaces based on the selection you make in step 5. then select the view to use to generate the parting line curves. solids. Press [Esc] to exit the function. then choose Done. The red circle is the resulting curve. 5.Projecting curves onto surfaces and solids 1. and/or solid faces. Choose Main Menu. select a highlighted surface to trim. 2. Select one or more chains of curves to project. and/or solid faces. Set parameters on the Projection Curve menu. then choose Done. 3. If prompted. Select one or more surfaces. solids. Create. 4. Curve. then choose Do it to project the curves. try performing the function on it separately from the other surfaces.

5. Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method. 6. Move the base of the arrow to the surface edge where you want to create the curve. If you do not get the trimming results you want on a particular surface. Mastercam trims all of the selected surfaces based on the selection you make in step 5. select a highlighted surface to trim. where the surface wraps out of view. One edge. then choose Do it to create the curves. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. Note: Choose Options to access additional parameters. Choose Break angle. Select a surface in the graphics window. If prompted. In the prompt area. Set the remaining parameters on the Parting Line Curve menu. 3. Note: This step is necessary only when creating curves along trimmed surfaces. Move the base of the arrow to the side of the surface that you want to keep after trimming. Notes: ¨ If trimming is active. Create.4. ¨ This function is often used with mold-making. Choose Options. then click. ¨ In the following graphic. and the gray lines represent the back of the surface (negative surface normal). 5. enter a break angle value. then click to create the curve. Select a Step Method and Spline Type. the red line represents the parting line curve. The green lines represent the front of the surface (positive surface normal). Creating a curve along one edge of a surface 1. but it may take longer to calculate the curves than other step methods. try performing the function on it separately from the other surfaces. 2. 4. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 98 . then choose OK. Choose Main Menu. Curve.

Choose Main Menu. Curve. Note: Mastercam creates a NURBS or parametric spline (depending on the spline type you selected in step 2). Create. Mastercam outputs an arc. representation of the solid edge. Creating a curve along one edge of a solid 1. Choose From solid from the One Edge Curve menu. 99 . 2. Select a solid edge in the graphics window. if the resulting curve is linear. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Press [Esc] to exit the function. but it may take longer to calculate the curves than other step methods.6. Create. Select one or more surfaces. Creating curves along all edges of selected surfaces and solids 1. then choose OK. 5. Note: The other One Edge Curve menu options pertain to creating curves along surface edges and do not need to be set when creating curves on solid edges. or NURBS spline based on the simplest. Note: Mastercam creates a line. then choose Done. and/or solid faces. 6. Set Step Method and Spline Type. In the prompt area. Choose Break angle. 5. Repeat step 3 to create additional curves along solid edges. 3. Mastercam creates a curve on the selected edge. Curve. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to create additional curves along surface edges. However. arc. Choose Do it to create the curves. 3. enter a break angle value. One edge. 7. 4. then choose Done. Mastercam outputs a line. 4. Choose Options. Note: This step is necessary only when creating curves along trimmed surfaces. 2. All edges. yet exact. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method. solids. and if the resulting curve is round. Choose Main Menu.

representation of the solid edge. Choose the CAD Settings tab. 2. or NURBS spline based on the simplest. you can also select a type at the time you create the spline or surface. 4. 1. Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. Screen. Mastercam creates a NURBS or parametric spline (depending on the spline type you selected in step 3). 3. Configure. While these types will be generated by default. and if the resulting curve is round. arc. yet exact. Mastercam creates a line. Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box. ¨ For solids. Mastercam outputs an arc. The options are: ¨ Parametric – curves defined by coefficients or nodes. also the surfaces defined from them. if the resulting curve is linear. ¨ NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline) – curves defined by knots or control points. also the surfaces defined from them.Notes: ¨ Steps 3 and 4 affect the creation of curves on surfaces. ¨ box. Select the default spline and surface type from the Spline/Surface creation type drop down menu. Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog 100 . Choose No to use the settings only for the current Mastercam session. you can omit these steps. ¨ ¨ Curve-generated or parametric if curve generation is not permitted. Specifying spline and surface type defaults The CAD Settings tab of the System Configuration dialog box lets you specify the type of spline or surface Mastercam will create by default whenever you create a spline or surface. See Surface types for more information on surface types. Do one of the following: Enter or choose other defaults. If your selection in step 2 contains only solids. The System Configuration dialog box opens. Curve-generated or NURBS if curve generation is not permitted. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. Mastercam outputs a line. However. ¨ For surfaces.

Use the mouse to select single entities to delete or use a selection method from the Delete menu to select multiple entities. Deleting selected entities 1. Choose Main Menu. The System Configuration dialog box opens. Check Delete duplicate entities when saving to delete entities. see Entity selection. then choose OK. Deleting duplicate entities 1. The Delete Duplicates dialog box appears. If prompted that there are entities associated with your selection. You can access the Delete menu by choosing Delete from the Main Menu. Configure. 4. 3. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Choose Main Menu. Deleting duplicate entities when opening files Duplicate entities make files larger than necessary and interfere with chaining. Mastercam highlights the duplicate entities and displays the number of each type of duplicate entity in the prompt area. Choose the attributes for the duplicate entities to delete. 2. 3.Deleting and restoring entities The Delete menu gives you options for deleting entities and restoring deleted entities. Mastercam notifies you of the number of entities deleted. Screen. Choose Main Menu. you can recover the deleted entities. Note: For information on how to use the selection methods available in step 2. see Restoring deleted entities. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Click on the topics below for more information. Duplicate. For more information. 1. 5. Get or File. Note: If necessary. choose Yes to delete both the selected entities and the associated entities or No to cancel the delete command. 2. Choose All to define the duplicate entities to delete based on entity type. Delete. or clear it to leave duplicate entities in the file. 3. 101 . ¨ Do one of the following: Enter or choose other defaults. Press [Enter] to delete the duplicate entities and return to the Delete menu. The Start/Exit tab of the System Configuration dialog box lets you automatically delete duplicate entities when a file is opened using the File. Merge functions. Choose the Start/Exit tab. 2. 4. Delete. 4.

Undelete. Restoring multiple entities 1. Click on the topics below for more information.¨ Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box. Mastercam restores entities in the reverse order in which they were deleted. Note: You can set the number of deleted entities that can be restored on the Allocations tab of the System Configuration dialog box (Screen. Note: Mastercam restores entities in the reverse order in which they were deleted. see Selecting all entities of a specified type. For information on using the All menu. Undelete. Use the All menu to define the entities to restore based on entity type and attributes. Single. Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. 2. enter the number of entities to restore. Delete. In the prompt area. Note: Mastercam restores entities in the reverse order in which they were deleted. Undelete. 2. All. Choose No to use the settings only for the current Mastercam session. Restoring a single deleted entity ¨ Choose Main Menu. Choose Main Menu. Restoring all entities of a specified definition 1. Number. Delete. Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog Restoring deleted entities The Undelete menu gives you options for restoring deleted entities to the graphics window. ¨ box. Configure). 102 . Notes: ¨ ¨ Mastercam restores entities in the reverse order in which they were deleted. Delete. Choose Main Menu.

Mastercam enables the Mirror label and note text option. you have the option to join the copied entities to the originals. 5. If your selection contains one or more drafting notes or labels. then choose Done. rotating. or Join. 2. A positive angle results in a counterclockwise rotation. Take one of the following actions: ¨ ¨ 6. Choose OK to mirror the entities. translating. Select one or more entities to mirror. Choose Main Menu. select the type of operation to perform: Move. a line or 2 points in the graphics window. Y axis. For more information. see Working with groups. Xform. You can mirror all geometric and drafting entity types. Choose Main Menu. Select one or more entities to rotate. The angle is calculated relative to the horizontal axis of the current construction plane. Rotate. 1. Mastercam displays the Mirror menu. When you perform a transform function. Mirroring entities Mirroring is the process of creating mirror images of entities by reflecting them symmetrically with respect to a defined axis. Mirror. Set the mirror axis to the X axis. 103 . Note: To see graphics showing how different mirror axes affect the transformed entities. and a negative angle results in a clockwise rotation. To mirror the text. Copy. Press [Esc]to exit the function. then choose Done. You can access the Xform menu by choosing Xform from the Main Menu. Click on the topics below for more information. 7. scaling. and rolling them. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to mirror additional entities. clear the option. 2. stretching. see Defining a mirror axis. 8. On the Mirror dialog box. With some functions. When your selection includes drafting notes or labels.Transforming entities The Xform menu gives you options for moving entities and optionally creating copies of them by mirroring. 1. offsetting. you have the option to mirror the text or to prevent the text from being reversed or turned upside down in the mirrored image. Rotating entities Rotating is the process of moving selected entities or one or more copies of the entities around a point by a defined angle. 4. 3. You can rotate all geometric and drafting entity types. Xform. Mastercam creates a temporary group from the original entities and a result from the transformed entities. You have the option to move or copy the original entities within the drawing. To prevent mirrored text from being turned upside down or reversed. check the option.

5. 4. 2. then choose OK to rotate the entities. Enter a value for Scale factor and Number of steps. The color purple indicates the result of the transform operation after the original entities are rotated by negative 45 degrees (clockwise). 3. select the type of operation to perform: Move. ¨ The following graphic shows geometry rotated about the yellow point. Scale. On the Rotate dialog box. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to rotate additional entities. 104 . Select one or more entities to scale. 4. Copy. then choose OK to scale the entities. You can use this function to scale all geometric and drafting entity types. select the type of operation to perform: Move. Enter a point in the graphics window. 6.3. then choose Done. When a single scale factor is used. The entities will be scaled relative to this point. or Join. The Scale dialog box displays. Scaling entities using a single scale factor Scaling increases or decreases the size of entities by a factor relative to a defined point. the increase or decrease is proportional along all axes (XYZ). Press [Esc]to exit the function. or Join. 6. Copy. Choose Main Menu. The color red indicates the group of entities selected for the transform operation. Xform. On the Scale dialog box. The entities change size while maintaining their original shape. Notes: Enter a point to rotate the entities about. 5. 7. Select Uniform in the scaling area. Enter a value for Rotation angle and Number of steps. 1.

Scaling entities using multiple scale factors Scaling increases or decreases the size of entities by a factor relative to a defined point. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to scale additional entities. The entities not only change size but may change shape as well. On the Scale dialog box. 1. A scale factor equal to 1 produces no change in size. see Associating drafting entities with geometry. you can manually regenerate the dimension to the correct value. select the type of operation to perform: Move or Copy. ¨ When scaling associative dimensions. see Scaling entities using multiple scale factors. Enter a point in the graphics window. Notes: ¨ For information on scaling entities using multiple scale factors. 105 . select only the geometry to scale. appearing to be stretched or squeezed from their original shape. Scaling both the geometry and the associated dimension causes the dimension value to no longer match the geometry. Scale. 7. Choose Main Menu. The color purple indicates the result of each transform operation after the original entities are scaled by a factor of 3 (triple their original size). 2. 8. If the auto regenerate feature is turned on. The color red indicates the group of entities selected for each transform operation. If the auto regenerate feature is off. A scale factor less than 1 shrinks the object.Note: A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the object. 4. Mastercam will update the dimension to match the scaled geometry. You can use this function to scale all geometric and drafting entity types except solids. in which case. For more information. not the dimension. ¨ The following graphics show two examples with the same geometry scaled about different points (yellow). Select one or more entities to scale. 3. Xform. You can apply a different scale factor to each of the axes (XYZ). Press [Esc] to exit the function. Mastercam marks the dimension as dirty. The entities will be scaled relative to this point. The Scale dialog box displays. then choose Done.

Notes: ¨ To increase or decrease entities by the same amount in all directions. select only the geometry to scale. and then choose OK to scale the entities. Press [Enter] to continue. enter the same value for the XYZ scale factors. The color red indicates the group of entities selected for the transform operation. Scaling both the geometry and the associated dimension causes the dimension value to no longer match the geometry. Press [Esc] to exit the function. in which case.75 (75% of their original size) in the X direction. Mastercam will update the dimension to match the scaled geometry. Mastercam converts the arcs to NURBS splines and displays the number of converted arcs in the prompt area. If the auto regenerate feature is turned on. ¨ The following graphic shows geometry scaled about a point (yellow) using different X and Y scale factors. see Associating drafting entities with geometry. A scale factor equal to 1 produces no change in size in the defined direction. or see Scaling entities using a single scale factor. A scale factor less than 1 shrinks the object in the defined direction. For more information.5. Enter the Scale factor to use in each direction (XYZ). 6. If your selection contained one or more arcs and you used different XYZ scale factors. 106 . If the auto regenerate feature is off. 7. you can manually regenerate the dimension to the correct value. ¨ When scaling associative dimensions. Mastercam marks the dimension as dirty. Note: A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the object in the defined direction. not the dimension. The color purple indicates the result of the transform operation after the original entities are scaled by a factor of 3 (triple their original size) in the Y direction and . 8. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to scale additional entities.

3. Select a line. see Defining a translation direction. Mastercam displays the Translate Direction menu. Choose Main Menu. You can move the entities within a plane or from one plane to another plane. You can quickly (but less precisely) translate entities using the Modify. Offsetting a single curve When Mastercam offsets a single curve. Enter a value for Offset distance and Number of steps. 2. 6. On the Translate dialog box. Mastercam moves the entity in the opposite direction from the one you indicate. Translate. select the type of operation to perform: Move or Copy. 6. Press [Esc]to exit the function.Translating entities Translating is the process of moving selected entities or one or more copies of the entities to new positions without altering the orientation. then choose Done. Click on one side or the other of the selected entity to indicate the offset direction. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to translate additional entities. two points. 5. 4. or shape of the entities. Offset. 1. Xform. Mastercam offsets the curve. You can translate all geometric and drafting entity types. The direction is perpendicular to the curve at every point along the curve relative to the current construction plane. Copy. 2. . 5. Notes: 107 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to offset additional curves or press [Esc] to exit the function. Select one or more entities to translate. Drag function. or spline in the graphics window. 4. polar coordinates. Xform. or Join) and enter a value for Number of steps. size. Choose Main Menu. 1. Choose OK to translate the entities. arc. Note: If you entered a negative offset distance on the Offset dialog box. it displaces it by a defined distance and direction. 3. Notes: ¨ ¨ To view a graphic of a translation between views. then choose OK to close the dialog box. or two points relative to two views. select the type of operation to perform (Move. On the Offset dialog box. Define a translation direction using rectangular coordinates.

Offsetting chains of curves When Mastercam offsets chains of curves. Offsetting inside the perimeter creates a smaller circle. depending on the offset direction. ¨ The Create. Set the offset direction by choosing Right or Left in the Offset section of the dialog box. 4. or press [Esc] to exit the function. or zero value. Note: This value is the distance that the chains will be offset in the Z direction (relative to the current construction plane). 9. 108 . Offsetting outside the perimeter creates a larger circle. see Creating parallel lines. 5. Choose Main Menu. For more information. Parallel function gives you several options for offsetting single lines. then choose OK to offset the chains. Select one or more chains of curves. 6. Indicate the type of operation to perform by choosing Move or Copy. negative. The offset direction that you will set in a following step is calculated relative to the chaining direction for each selected chain. Line. it is important to pay attention to the chaining direction. 1. You can enter a positive value only. Enter a value for Distance in the Offset section of the dialog box. You can enter a positive. Set the remaining parameters on the Offset Contour dialog box. Xform. Note: When making your selection. it displaces them by a defined distance and direction and optionally a depth. then choose Done. 8. 3. 7. Enter a value for Number of steps to set the number of times to perform the operation. Enter a value for Offset depth and indicate whether the depth is Absolute or Incremental. The offset is perpendicular to the chains of curves at every position along the curves relative to the current construction plane.¨ Offsetting a spline by a distance greater than the radius of the smallest curve in the spline may cause the spline to self-intersect. Notes: Repeat steps 2 through 8 to offset additional chains of curves. Note: This value is the distance that the chains will be offset in the XY directions (relative to the current construction plane). 2. ¨ Offsetting an arc or circle creates a larger or smaller arc or circle. Ofs ctour. Mastercam opens the Offset Contour dialog box.

Stretching entities Stretching is the process of moving (translating) entities or one or more copies of the entities to new positions and optionally lengthening or shortening selected lines. 4. Define a translation direction using rectangular coordinates. 109 . polar coordinates. You can perform the Stretch function on all geometric and drafting entities except solids. On the Stretch dialog box. Choose OK to translate/stretch the entities. The following graphic illustrates this relationship. 3. Stretch. 5.¨ Offsetting a spline by a distance greater than the radius of the smallest curve in the spline may cause the spline to self-intersect. Use the Stretch Menu to select entities to stretch. while the endpoints that lie outside the selection window maintain their original positions. or two points relative to two views. depending on the offset direction. Xform. you can define the offset distance by entering a value for Taper angle. Lines are stretched when they cross or intersect the window used to select the entities. 6. Offsetting outside the perimeter creates a larger circle. Choose Main Menu. Offsetting inside the perimeter creates a smaller circle. ¨ When offsetting 2D chains using a depth other than zero. two points. select the type of operation to perform (Move or Copy) and enter a value for Number of steps. 2. 1. Press [Esc]to exit the function. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to translate/stretch additional entities. ¨ Offsetting an arc or circle creates a larger or smaller arc or circle. This parameter is directly related to the Distance parameter in the Offset section of the dialog box. The line endpoints that lie within the selection window are translated.

This value determines the size of the cylindrical shape about which the geometry is transformed. 4. Enter a value for Rotary diameter. This value determines how closely the transformed (target) geometry fits the original geometry. then choose Done. Determine the type of transformation to perform: Roll or Unroll. Note: The rotation axis is relative to the current construction plane. Mastercam opens the Roll dialog box. Splines. called target geometry. arcs. 5. and Wire. 9. based on the break points. or Nurbs. Select one or more entities. Mill. You can choose to create points at the break points or lines or splines between the break points. Note: Your selection can include points. arcs. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam breaks the entities relative to an angle tolerance. Roll. lines. 6. you can choose Z axis or X axis. Lines. Enter a value for Angle tolerance. 7. Indicate the type of target geometry to create by choosing Points. Indicate the type of operation to perform by choosing Move or Copy. Indicate the axis to transform the entities about. 2. and splines about an axis as though around a cylinder or unwrap rolled entities to make them lie flat. To fit entities in a cylindrical shape when rolling them or to flatten entities when unrolling them. In Mastercam Design.Notes: ¨ The following graphics show a rectangle that is stretched out of shape (bottom graphic) when two of its lines are intersected by a selection window (top graphic) and translated to a new position. Xform. and splines. 1. you can choose X axis or Y axis. 8. A smaller value results in a more precise fit. 3. Rolling and unrolling entities The Roll function lets you wrap lines. It then generates new geometry. 110 . Indicate the direction to transform the entities about the axis by choosing CW or CCW. In Mastercam Lathe.

¨ To position the target geometry relative to a translation vector. and splines to the current construction plane. Enter the Depth or choose: ¨ The Construction depth check box (so that the projected entities remain at the current construction depth) ¨ The Construction attributes check box (so that attributes of the projected entities use the current construction color. Squash. The system converts arcs to NURBS splines if they are not parallel to the construction plane. Select an operation: Move. 2D plane. Choose Main Menu. Choose OK. 4. 3. Copy. Xform. 111 . Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. then enter a value in the text box. lines. 2. Squashing entities The Squash dialog box allows you to project selected points.10. the dialog box reopens. 11. 7. 6. After you enter two points. The Squash dialog box displays. 5. Select the entities to project using the General Selection menu and choose Done. and line width) Note: You can choose either or both check boxes. 1. choose Angle. or Join. This means you can select entities in various positions in 3D space and squash them into a flat. arcs. line style. Define the translation vector by entering a point to translate from and a point to translate to. choose Associate pts. Repeat steps 2 thru 5 to project additional entities. Choose OK to close the dialog box and transform the geometry. level. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Set the position of the target geometry by taking one of the following actions: ¨ To position the target geometry relative to an angle value. then choose Select.

and N. You can access the Fillet menu by choosing Main Menu. L. This option is a Yes/No toggle. Mastercam trims the curves to the fillet. and F. Chain .Determines the sweep of the fillet arc. Click on the menu and topics below for more information. Radius . Angle . L (Larger) to create fillets that are larger than 180 degrees.Modifying entities The Modify menu gives you options for modifying entities. or clockwise (CW) corners (relative to the chaining direction). or F (Full) to create fillets that are full circles (360 degrees). P to create fillets at positive. You can access the Modify menu by choosing Modify from the Main Menu. See Filleting corners along chains of curves for more information. Fillet.Determines whether Mastercam trims the selected curves to the fillet. P. Trim .Determines the size of the resulting fillets. or counterclockwise (CCW) corners (relative to the chaining direction). Choose S (Smaller) to create fillets that are smaller than 180 degrees.Displays the Chaining Methods menu where you can select chains of curves to create fillets at sharp corners along the chains. This option toggles between S. Click on the topics below for more information. Choose Y to activate trimming or N to deactivate trimming. This option toggles between A. 112 . Determines which corners are used to create fillets along the chains of curves. By default. although you have the option to turn off trimming. Fillet or by choosing Main Menu. Filleting curves The Fillet menu gives you options for filleting curves. or N to create fillets at negative. When you fillet curves. Modify. Choose A to create fillets along all corners. Create. you create an arc of a defined radius tangent to the curves.

3. in cases where the intersection between two curves offers variable solutions. Select a line. 1 entity. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Modify. be sure to select each curve on the part of the curve that you want to keep. Trim. The result varies depending on where you select the line. These parts often require different radius values on inside versus outside corners in order to provide adequate corner clearance. The curves must lie in the same Cplane. the curves must have an actual intersection. Mastercam trims curves by cutting them back or extending them at their intersections. 2. Finally. however. or if the Cplane is set to 3D. Trimming one curve This function trims one curve to its intersection with a second curve without modifying the second entity. arc.Notes: ¨ This option applies only when Filleting corners along chains of curves. Trimming curves The Trim menu gives you options for trimming curves to one another. You can access the Trim menu by choosing Main Menu. Note: The following graphics show the selection of a vertical line trimmed to the horizontal line. 113 . Mastercam does not extend splines beyond their original endpoints. Modify. ¨ The ability to fillet only inside or outside corners of a chained boundary is particularly useful during geometry creation for wire EDM parts (punches and dies). arc. Trim. 1. Select a line. Choose Main Menu. or spline to trim to. or spline to trim. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to trim additional curves. 5. 4.

5. Trim. Modify. The arc is selected last. arc. as shown in the following graphic. The third curve is then trimmed to the first two curves. or splines to trim. 5. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to trim additional entities. 114 . Trim. 3. Press [Esc] to exit the function.Trimming two curves This function trims two curves to their intersection. The result varies depending on where you select the lines. 2. Note: This function is useful for trimming two lines to a circle that is tangent to both lines. Choose Main Menu. 2 entities. arcs. or spline as the first entity to trim. Select two lines. 3. Select a line. arc. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to trim additional entities. 1. Choose Main Menu. Note: The following graphics show the selection of a two lines trimmed to their intersection. or spline to trim to. 3 entities. 4. Modify. or spline as the second entity to trim. arc. The first two curves that you select are trimmed to the third selected curve. 4. Trimming three curves This function trims three curves. Select a line. and the results vary depending on whether you select to keep the top or the bottom of the arc. Press [Esc] to exit the function. which acts as a trimming curve. Select a line. 1. 2.

Press [Esc] to exit the function. Trim. If the point that you enter does not lie on the selected entity. Choose Main Menu.Trimming a curve to a point This function trims a curve to a point or any defined position in the graphics window. 2. Mastercam calculates the closest position on the entity and trims the entity to that point. then choose Done. Modify. extended) to a point that does not lie on the curve. Trimming multiple curves to a single trimming curve This function trims multiple curves to a selected trimming curve without modifying the trimming curve. Trim. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to trim additional curves. Select a line. 2. To point. 5. arcs. 4. 1. Many. Modify. and splines to trim. arc. Enter a point to trim to. 115 . 3. or spline. 1. Choose Main Menu. Select one or more lines. Note: The following graphic shows an arc that is trimmed (in this case.

Choose Main Menu. Choose Main Menu. Modify. Divide. Repeat step 2 to close additional arcs. or splines to use as dividing curves. 4. 116 . 6.3. Closing an arc to form a full circle 1. each containing four arcs that are trimmed to a line (red). arc. 4. Select any two lines. 3. The dashed green line shows the portion of each arc that is trimmed. arcs. or spline to trim to. 2. Select an entity on the side of the trimming curve that you want to keep. Select an arc that is less than 360 degrees. Dividing a line or arc between two trimming curves This function trims a line or arc into two disjointed segments by removing the segment that lies between two dividing curves. Trim. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to divide additional curves Press [Esc] to exit the function. Trim. which varies depending on which side of the curves you select to keep. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to trim additional curves. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Modify. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 4. 5. 1. 2. 5. Select a line. Note: The following graphic shows a line that is trimmed between two arcs. Select a line or arc to divide. Note: The following graphic shows two examples. 3. Close arc.

Choose Main Menu. The system breaks the entity into two segments. Modify. 5. 2. Breaking a curve into two segments at a defined point 1. You can access the Break menu by choosing Main Menu. Breaking a line into multiple segments 1. Enter a point where you want to break the selected entity. Choose Main Menu. Take one of the following actions: 117 . Breaking a curve into two segments at a defined length 1. Choose Main Menu. Break. crosshatches. At length. enter a value for length.Breaking entities The Break menu gives you option for breaking curves into multiple segments and for breaking drafting entities. Break. Break. arc. Modify. Press [Esc] to exit the function. the system finds the location on the curve that is closest to the point and breaks the curve at that point. 2 pieces. 5. or spline. 4. Select a line. Mastercam breaks the curve at the defined length from the selected endpoint. Select a line. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to break additional entities. arc. Break. 3. 4. 2. Mny pieces. Modify. Press [Esc] to exit the function. In the prompt area. 3. or spline near the endpoint that you want to use to calculate length. Modify. Note: If you enter a break point that does not lie on the selected curve. and copious data into geometric entities. 3. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to break additional entities. 2. Select a line in the graphics window.

5. choose by Length. 3. enter the number of segments. Mny pieces. Choose Main Menu.¨ To break the line into a defined number of segments. Mny pieces. choose by Length. enter the segment length. In the prompt area. Seg length. enter the number of segments. choose Num seg. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to break additional arcs. In the prompt area. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to break additional lines. Break. 2. 4. Take one of the following actions: ¨ To break the spline into a defined number of segments. Select an arc in the graphics window. Num seg. Modify. 5. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Break. enter the segment length. In the prompt area. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Select a spline in the graphics window. choose Seg length. Modify. Choose Main Menu. 6. 7. ¨ To break the arc into segments of a defined length. ¨ To break the spline into segments of a defined length. Set Arcs to Y to break the arc into arc segments or N to break it into line segments. In the prompt area. ¨ To break the line into segments of a defined length. 6. 118 . enter the segment length. 2. choose Seg length. enter the number of segments. Breaking a spline into multiple line segments 1. Take one of the following actions: ¨ To break the arc into a defined number of segments. Breaking an arc into multiple arc or line segments 1. 4. In the prompt area. Choose Do it to break the arc. choose Num seg. Choose Do it to break the line. 3. In the prompt area.

Choose Do it to break the spline. Mastercam displays temporary points at each break point. Breaking curves at their intersections with other curves 1. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to break additional splines. 2. or 2D splines that lie in undefined views. labels. enter the chord height tolerance (distance) that determines how closely the resulting arc and line segments fit the original splines. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Note: A smaller value results in a closer fit. arcs. Select one or more lines. 4. Choose Main Menu. 2D splines that do not lie in the current Cplane. or splines. 6. Choose Main Menu. In the prompt area. Choose Do it to break the selected splines. Select one or more 2D splines. witness lines. Draft/line. Breaking 2D splines into arc and line segments 1. 1. then choose Done. Note: Mastercam does not break 3D splines.¨ To break the spline based on a chord height tolerance. Choose Main Menu. set Dispose to B. then choose Done. and leader lines into lines. ¨ ¨ ¨ 5. A larger value results in a looser fit. set Dispose to K. In the prompt area. Break. Break. 5. A larger value results in a looser fit. set Dispose to D. Note: A smaller value results in a closer fit. Spl to arcs. Take one of the following actions: To keep the splines. Error. and NURBS splines. arcs. To blank the splines. At inters. To delete the splines. Note: Press [F3] to remove the display points. 3. 119 . Modify. choose by Error. Modify. Modify. 2. Breaking drafting entities into geometric entities This function breaks drafting dimensions. 4. Choose Error. notes. enter the chord height tolerance (distance) that determines how closely the resulting segments fit the original spline. Break.

Breaking the geometry perpendicular to the STCW position In Wire EDM. Note: Copious data is an entity type that originates in an IGES file and represents a collection of geometric forms (points and lines). Mastercam Wire automatically breaks the entity that is closest to the thread point. The newly created lines have the same line style as the crosshatch pattern. Repeat step 2 to break additional crosshatches. 2." When this option is activated and you chain geometry for a wirepath. or work origin position. Repeat step 2 to break additional entities.2. Choose Main Menu. While the STCW position may appear to be perpendicular to the contour. Mastercam Wire requires a start of contour to begin cutting the part. Choose Main Menu. Note: Mastercam Wire allows you to set a chaining option "Break closest entity to thread point. Press [Esc] to exit the function. The options in this menu let you choose to break a line or an arc at a point perpendicular to the current start. perpendicular to the thread point. 1. 3. Hatch/line. Break. Using the chaining option to break the geometry is equivalent to using this procedure. you create an entity endpoint that can be used for the start of contour when chaining. 1. 3. Break. STCW position. Modify. Modify. You have the option to convert copious data to points and lines when you read an IGES file into Mastercam. 4. 2. 1. thread. Breaking copious data into points and lines This function breaks a copious data entity into points or lines. 4. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Select one or more drafting entities. depending on the form of the copious data entity. By breaking the geometry. Modify. Choose Main Menu. STCW position opens the STCW Position Settings menu. Choosing Main Menu. Break. 120 . Modify. Break. Cdata/line. Breaking hatch entities into lines This function breaks lines in a crosshatch pattern into line entities. cut. Select a crosshatch to break. Select a copious data entity to break. it is a general rule of thumb to lead in to the part geometry perpendicular to the contour. Mastercam breaks the entities and exits the function.

C. Join.2." the entity you are trying to break cannot be broken perpendicular to the S. T. and also allow you to easily specify lead in/out moves for the tab cuts. 3. 121 . we recommend creating tabs using the tab parameters in the Cuts tab of the contour or 4-axis wirepath dialog box. this method breaks the selected entity at the point that you choose and marks the entity endpoint with a glue stop or program stop. or W position without extending the entity. or W position perpendicular to which you want to break the geometry. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam Wire inserts the stop code when it generates the wirepath. Note: If Mastercam Wire displays the message "cannot break line or arc past its endpoints. T. or spline. arcs that have the same center and radius. Creating tabs with Modify. arc. Select another entity of the same type.360 degrees and that match the main system color into two 180-degree arcs. Break. the system automatically breaks all arcs that have a sweep of +/. Make tab is an alternate method of creating a tab on a wirepath. Break. 3. or W position. The files for this C-Hook include: ¨ ¨ ¨ Breakcir. Choose the from the menu the S. Make tab Choosing Main Menu. The parameters allow for easy modification using associativity. You can view the stop code when backplotting the wirepath. This function helps prepare geometry for the post processor by eliminating full circles. 5. Breakcir C-Hook When you run the Breakcir C-Hook. To make a tab. 2. Break. C. T. Modify.dll Breakcir. or splines that were originally created as the same entity.txt Breakcir. C. 4. Note: While the Modify. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to join additional curves.doc Joining segments of broken curves This function joins collinear lines. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Select the entity to break. Select a line. Make tab function provides continuity for users of previous versions of Mastercam Wire. Choose Esc when done. 4. 1. Modify. Choose another entity or move the S.

Select one or more surfaces. ¨ To check the surface normal direction before reversing it. see About surface normals. 2. normal direction points downward relative to the current Cplane. Modify. Normal. see About surface normals. Normal. Choose Main Menu. 122 . Click on the topics below for more information. Repeat step 2 to reverse the normal direction for additional surfaces. Mastercam reverses the surface normal direction. Surfaces. Set norms Press [Esc] to exit the function. Modify. Modifying surface normals The Modify Normal menu gives you options for checking and changing surface normal directions. In the prompt area. Reverse. then choose Done. Choose Main Menu. ¨ If the two entities that you select to join have different attributes. The plus sign indicates the currently selected menu option. You can perform the same function by choosing Main Menu. 3. Notes: ¨ ¨ For more information about surface normals. Normal. or positive. Select a surface in the graphics window. Set. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Setting the surface normal direction upward relative to the current Cplane This function checks selected surfaces and reverses the normal direction on any surface whose outward. Mastercam reports the number of reversals. Notes: ¨ For more information about surface normals. 4. Analyze. 2. 1. You can access this menu by choosing Main Menu.Notes: ¨ This function is useful for joining curves that were broken or trimmed. Modify. see Checking and optionally reversing the surface normal direction. the system creates the new entity using the attributes of the first entity that you select. 3. Reversing the surface normal direction 1.

This menu gives you options for modifying the position or weight of the selected control point. 123 . Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the surface. Mastercam modifies the position of the control point relative to the position of the starting and ending points that you enter. 6. which changes the shape of the NURBS entity that is defined by the control point. surface normal direction by taking one of the following actions: Choose OK to accept the direction of the normal (the outward direction). Cpts NURBS. 3. a smaller arrowhead indicates that the normal vector points away from you. Dragging a control point to a new position 1. A larger arrowhead indicates that the normal vector points toward you.Checking and optionally reversing the surface normal direction 1. Set the outward. Changing the shape of a NURBS spline or surface Mastercam displays the Modify NURBS Cpts menu when you are in the process of modifying a control point on a NURBS spline or NURBS surface (Main Menu. Choose Dynamic. or positive. Choose Flip to reverse the direction of the normal (the outward direction). 2. normal direction based on the cursor position. ¨ ¨ When you can see the arrow clearly. 2. Select a control point. Enter a starting point to begin dragging the control point. 3. Modify. Select a surface. Dynamic. Choose Main Menu. or positive. Mastercam displays a direction menu. 5. Note: To reverse the surface normal direction quickly without checking it first. Modify. Modify. 4. The system highlights the control points in the graphics window. Enter an ending point to set its position. 4. 5. then choose OK. Move the arrow along the surface to check the normal direction. The arrow points in the outward. Choose Main Menu. Note: The size of the arrowhead changes to reflect the arrow’s position relative to your perspective in the current graphics view. see Reversing the surface normal direction. Select a NURBS spline or NURBS surface. click to set its position. Normal. Cpts NURBS).

and parametric revolved surfaces that were converted to NURBS format. If you select one in step 3. 124 . Modify. Choose Main Menu. ¨ For each control point on a NURBS surface there is a corresponding green point. Press [Esc] to exit the function. If you select one in step 3. Notes: ¨ You cannot undo [Alt+U] this function. Press [Esc] to exit the function. which reflects the control point’s center of influence. ¨ For each control point on a NURBS surface there is a corresponding green point. which reflects the control point’s center of influence. 7. Modifying the weight of a control point You can modify the weight of a control point for rational NURBS entities only. NURBS revolved surfaces. Note: If the control points are no longer displayed. Select a NURBS spline or NURBS surface. Cpts NURBS. 5. you may need to press [Esc] and return to step 2. Repeat steps 3 through 6 to modify additional control points. you may need to press [Esc] and return to step 2. Notes: ¨ You cannot undo [Alt+U] this function. Choose Main Menu. 4. You cannot modify these points. Choose Point entry. Examples of rational NURBS entities include: NURBS ellipses. 6. Modify. Moving a control point to a defined position 1.7. curve-generated revolved surfaces that were converted to NURBS format. Select a control point. Mastercam modifies the position of the control point. Enter a point for the position of the control point. 1. Mastercam automatically selects the corresponding control point to modify. 8. 3. Mastercam automatically selects the corresponding control point to modify. The system highlights the control points in the graphics window. Note: If the control points are no longer displayed. Cpts NURBS. You cannot modify these points. 2. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to modify additional control points. arcs that were converted to NURBS format.

Extending or trimming a curve by a defined length 1. Extend. and surfaces. Modify. The system highlights the control points in the graphics window. arcs. Converting curves and surfaces to NURBS format This function converts lines. 2. Select one or more curves or surfaces. Choose Weight. splines. In the prompt area. enter a value for the weight of the control point. then choose Done. Notes: ¨ You cannot undo [Alt+U] this function. which reflects the control point’s center of influence. 4. arcs. Modify. Choose Main Menu. and a lower value pushes the NURBS entity away from the control point. 3. 6. Repeat step 2 to convert additional entities. Select a rational NURBS spline or surface. Modify. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Note: The weight of a control point affects its influence on the NURBS entity that it defines. Mastercam converts the selected entities to NURBS format. Note: If the control points are no longer displayed. 7. 3. A higher value pulls the NURBS entity toward the control point. 4. you may need to press [Esc] and return to step 2. You cannot modify these points. 125 . X to NURBS. 1. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to modify additional control points. and parametric splines to NURBS splines and curve-generated and parametric surfaces to NURBS surfaces. ¨ For each control point on a NURBS surface there is a corresponding green point. If you select one in step 3. You can access the Extend menu by choosing Main Menu. 5.2. Mastercam automatically selects the corresponding control point to modify. Extend. Choose Main Menu. Length. Extending entities The Extend menu gives you options for extending lines. Select a control point.

Mastercam creates the extended surface using the same surface type (parametric. 2. 7. 9. it creates the extended surface as a new surface. Set Linear to Y to extend the surface linearly or to N to extend the surface according to the curvature of the surface. 3. You can extend the surface linearly or following the curvature of the surface. Create. 8. However. Repeat steps 5 through 7 to extend additional surfaces. ¨ When possible. NURBS. Extend. as needed.2. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. Surface. the system cannot extend all surfaces precisely. and you can choose to keep. or curve-generated) as the original surface. enter a value for length. Select a surface in the graphics window. You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. 5. Press [Esc] to exit the function. In the prompt area. 6. Modify. Select a line. Trim/extend. Choose Length. 10. When Mastercam extends a surface. blank. Extending a surface by a defined length This function extends a surface by a defined length. enter the length to extend the surface. In the prompt area. Move the base of the arrow to the edge to extend. Note: A positive value extends the entity. 4. Set other parameters on the Extend Surface menu. 1. Note: This step is not necessary if Linear is set to N. Notes: ¨ ¨ You can extend trimmed surfaces only along untrimmed edges. and a negative value trims the entity. 3. Repeat step 3 to extend or trim additional curves by the defined length. Choose Main Menu. For example. 5. Surface. Extend. 4. or delete the original surface. then click. Press [Esc] to exit the function. or spline close to the endpoint that you want to extend or trim. Note: You can perform this step repeatedly to extend the surface incrementally by the defined length. you cannot extend curve-generated surfaces linearly and have them remain curve- 126 . Set To plane to N. Choose Do it to extend the surface. arc.

and stretching them. Modify. Click on the topics below for more information. Mastercam displays the prompt shown below. Set To plane to Y. Create. However. Use the Define Plane menu to define the plane to extend the surface to. Select a surface in the graphics window. 5. 6. Choosing Yes tells the system to create a NURBS approximation of the surface. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. Mastercam creates the extended surface using the same surface type (parametric. and you can choose to keep. it creates the extended surface as a new surface. or delete the original surface. 3. Dragging entities using translation This function quickly and dynamically moves selected entities or a copy of the entities to a new position in the graphics window. Drag. you cannot extend curve-generated surfaces linearly and have them remain curvegenerated. then click. Extend. Move the base of the arrow to the edge to extend. or curve-generated) as the original surface. rotating. Choose Do it to extend the surface. Surface. Choose Plane. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Extending a surface to a plane This function extends a surface linearly to a defined plane. For example. 9. Choosing Yes tells the system to create a NURBS approximation of the surface. blank. Choose Main Menu. Choosing No tells the system not to extend the surface. 7. 1. Dragging entities to new positions in the graphics window The Drag dialog box gives you options for quickly and dynamically moving entities in the graphics window by translating. 127 . Notes: ¨ ¨ You can extend trimmed surfaces only along untrimmed edges. Surface. 1. Choosing No tells the system not to extend the surface. NURBS. Modify. Set other parameters on the Extend Surface menu. Choose Main Menu. Extend. You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu. In such cases. the system cannot extend all surfaces precisely. 2. When Mastercam extends a surface. 8. You can access the Drag dialog box by choosing Main Menu. In such cases. Modify. Trim/extend.generated. Mastercam displays the prompt shown below. ¨ When possible. Set Linear to Y. Drag. as needed. 4.

Copy – Select this option to make a copy of the selected entities.2. 128 . Drag the entities in the graphics window. then click to set their position. 11. ¨ [+] – CCW – Drags the selected entity in a counterclockwise direction at the angle specified in either the Drag dialog box or the [A] Angle option. ¨ ¨ 5. Choose Translate. 8. 6. ¨ ¨ [T] – Translate – Toggles the Drag function from the Rotate mode.Drags the selected entity in a clockwise direction at the angle specified in either the Drag dialog box or the [A] Angle option. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Enter Step Parameters values: ¨ Angle – Enter the angle at which the entity will be rotated. When in translate mode. ¨ ¨ [H] – Horizontal – Drags the selected entity horizontally. If desired. 9. Choose OK. 3. Choose Done. using the + and – keys. [R] – Rotate – Toggles the Drag function from the Translate mode. Select the geometry to transform. [V] – Vertical – Drags the selected entity vertically. The Drag dialog box displays. use the + and – keys to rotate while dragging the entity with the mouse. ¨ [S] – Snap – Opens the Point Entry menu which allows you to snap the selected entity to a defined position. use one of the following option keys while dragging the entities: ¨ [A] – Angle – Prompts you to enter an angle value at which the entity will be dragged incrementally. Select one of the Operation functions: Move – Select this option to move the selected entities. 10. ¨ [-] – CW . Select the starting point. 4. ¨ XY – Enter X or Y to select an axis for the translation. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window to select a point on the entity that determines the value to be used for translating along the selected axis. 7.

Enter X or Y to select an axis to translate the entity along. ¨ Choose Main Menu. then click to set their position. [T] – Translate – Toggles the Drag function from the Rotate mode. using the + and – keys. The Drag dialog box displays. 129 . Mastercam returns you to the graphics window to select a point on the entity that determines the value to be used for translating along the selected axis while rotating the entity with the mouse. If desired. 4. 9. Drag. Choose Rotate Choose OK. 8. You can use the + and – keys to translate the entity while rotating. Select the geometry to rotate. 2. 7. 3. 1. 6. ¨ ¨ 5.Dragging entities using rotation This function quickly and dynamically moves selected entities or a copy of the entities by rotating the entities about a point. Drag the entities in the graphics window. [V] – Vertical – Drags the selected entity vertically. use one of the following option keys while dragging the entities: ¨ [A] – Angle – Prompts you to enter an angle value at which the entity will be dragged incrementally. Select the starting point. Select one of the Operation functions: Move – Select this option to move the selected entities. ¨ XY . Choose Done. [S] – Snap – Snaps the selected entity to a defined position. ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ [H] – Horizontal – Drags the selected entity horizontally. 10. Enter Step Parameters values: Angle – Enter the angle at which the entity will be rotated as you drag the entity with the mouse. Modify. Copy – Select this option to move a copy of the selected entities. [R] – Rotate – Toggles the Drag function from the Translate mode.

Drag the entities in the graphics window. ¨ [-] – CW . You can use the + and – keys to translate the entity while stretching. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Enter Step Parameters values: ¨ Angle – Enter the angle at which the entity will be rotated. and draw a window around the lines you wish to stretch. (Use the + or – keys to rotate as the entity is being stretched with the mouse. Modify. Choose OK. 7. Dragging entities using stretch methods This function quickly and dynamically moves (translates) selected entities or copies of the entities to new positions and optionally stretches (lengthens or shortens) selected lines. 6. then click to set their position. 130 . Choose Main Menu. Choose Rotate or Translate. 2. 12. The Drag dialog box displays. Select one of the Operation functions: Move – Select this option to move the selected entities. Repeat steps 6 through 10 to transform the same set of selected entities or steps 2 through 10 to transform a new set of entities. 1. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window to select a point on the entity that determines the value to be used for translating along the selected axis while stretching the entity with the mouse.¨ [+] – CCW – Drags the selected entity in a counterclockwise direction at the angle specified in either the Drag dialog box or the [A] Angle option. Select the starting point. 11. The line endpoints that lie within the selection window are translated. while the endpoints that lie outside the selection window maintain their original positions. 9. 3. 8.Drags the selected entity in a clockwise direction at the angle specified in either the Drag dialog box or the [A] Angle option. Drag. 4. Choose Window.) ¨ XY – Enter X or Y to select an axis to translate the entity along. and select Stretch. Choose Done. ¨ ¨ 5. Lines are stretched when they cross or intersect the window used to select the entities. Copy – Select this option to move a copy of the selected entities.

2. 1. Note: This function is particularly useful if geometry that is supposed to denote circles or arcs is read into Mastercam as splines during a file conversion. Repeat steps 2 through 10 to stretch additional entities. Rotate Xform. you can more easily and accurately determine do so if they are arcs instead of splines. Cnv to arcs.10. using the + and – keys.Drags the selected entity in a clockwise direction at the angle specified in either the Drag dialog box or the [A] Angle option. ¨ [+] – CCW – Drags the selected entity in a counterclockwise direction at the angle specified in either the Drag dialog box or the [A] Angle option. [V] – Vertical – Drags the selected entity vertically. Stretch Creating arcs from circular splines This function creates arcs based on the geometry of circular-shaped splines. 12. [S] – Snap – Snaps the selected entity to a defined position. Set parameters on the Modify Circular Splines to Arcs menu. Modify. the following Xform functions offer more advanced and precise transformation methods: Xform. Press [Esc] to exit the function Note: While the Drag function serves as a quick way to move entities in the graphics window. 11. [R] – Rotate – Toggles the Drag function from the Translate mode. If desired. Press [Enter] to erase the message. Select one or more circular-shaped splines. 131 . ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ [H] – Horizontal – Drags the selected entity horizontally. Choose Main Menu. 3. Mastercam displays the number of arcs that were successfully created. [T] – Translate – Toggles the Drag function from the Rotate mode. Translate Xform. ¨ [-] – CW . Press [Esc] to exit the function. use one of the following option keys while dragging the entities: ¨ [A] – Angle – Prompts you to enter an angle value at which the entity will be dragged incrementally. 5. then choose Done. then choose Do it to create the arcs. If you later want to reference the centers of the circular geometry or dimension the circles. 4.

Press [Esc] to exit the function. 7. Select a NURBS spline or NURBS surface. Choose Main Menu. 3. you may need to press [Esc] and return to step 2. Mastercam modifies the position of the control point relative to the position of the starting and ending points that you enter. Repeat steps 3 through 6 to modify additional control points. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 2. 3. 2. 4. or spline close to the endpoint that you want to extend or trim.Extending or trimming a curve by a defined length 1. Select a line. enter a value for length. Choose Dynamic. 8. In the prompt area. arc. Choose Main Menu. The system highlights the control points in the graphics window. and a negative value trims the entity. Changing the shape of a NURBS spline or surface Mastercam displays the Modify NURBS Cpts menu when you are in the process of modifying a control point on a NURBS spline or NURBS surface (Main Menu. 5. which changes the shape of the NURBS entity that is defined by the control point. Cpts NURBS. Modify. Cpts NURBS). Enter a starting point to begin dragging the control point. Notes: ¨ You cannot undo [Alt+U] this function. Note: A positive value extends the entity. Note: If the control points are no longer displayed. 5. Modify. Repeat step 3 to extend or trim additional curves by the defined length. Extend. Select a control point. Length. This menu gives you options for modifying the position or weight of the selected control point. Dragging a control point to a new position 1. Modify. 6. 132 . 4. Enter an ending point to set its position.

Examples of rational NURBS entities include: NURBS ellipses. Choose Point entry. 4. 5. You cannot modify these points. Mastercam automatically selects the corresponding control point to modify. ¨ For each control point on a NURBS surface there is a corresponding green point. 1. 7. Cpts NURBS. Modifying the weight of a control point You can modify the weight of a control point for rational NURBS entities only. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to modify additional control points. curve-generated revolved surfaces that were converted to NURBS format. If you select one in step 3. 2. Select a NURBS spline or NURBS surface.¨ For each control point on a NURBS surface there is a corresponding green point. 3. 2. and parametric revolved surfaces that were converted to NURBS format. In the prompt area. Choose Weight. NURBS revolved surfaces. arcs that were converted to NURBS format. 3. Select a rational NURBS spline or surface. which reflects the control point’s center of influence. Modify. The system highlights the control points in the graphics window. Notes: ¨ You cannot undo [Alt+U] this function. 133 . Cpts NURBS. Moving a control point to a defined position 1. If you select one in step 3. Enter a point for the position of the control point. 6. Mastercam modifies the position of the control point. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Choose Main Menu. Select a control point. 5. Mastercam automatically selects the corresponding control point to modify. 4. Choose Main Menu. Select a control point. which reflects the control point’s center of influence. enter a value for the weight of the control point. Note: If the control points are no longer displayed. The system highlights the control points in the graphics window. You cannot modify these points. you may need to press [Esc] and return to step 2. Modify.

or away from the solid volume. About surface normals A surface normal is a vector (direction) that is perpendicular to the tangent plane of a surface at the point of tangency. ¨ For each control point on a NURBS surface there is a corresponding green point. You cannot modify these points. inward) direction. solid faces have two normal vectors. A higher value pulls the NURBS entity toward the control point. One is referred to as the positive (front. outward) direction. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to modify additional control points. The positive normal direction always points outward. you may need to press [Esc] and return to step 2. the default positive normal direction is based on the relative directions of the curves defining the surface. which reflects the control point’s center of influence. the other is referred to as the negative (back. which point in opposite directions. 6. Each surface has two normal vectors. Note: If the control points are no longer displayed. When a surface is created. If you select one in step 3. Notes: ¨ Like surfaces. and a lower value pushes the NURBS entity away from the control point. Mastercam automatically selects the corresponding control point to modify.Note: The weight of a control point affects its influence on the NURBS entity that it defines. the arrow shows the normal vector directions of a surface at the position of the base of the arrow. Notes: ¨ You cannot undo [Alt+U] this function. 7. 134 . Press [Esc] to exit the function. In the following graphics.

¨ When creating fillet surfaces between two sets of surfaces (Create. applies a defined color to the back (negative) side of the wireframe display of a surface. regardless of the normal directions. If you enter a negative offset distance. For more information. you have the option to create the curves at an offset position of the surfaces and solids. Identifying the positive surface normal direction There are several ways to identify the positive normal direction of a surface: ¨ The Show Back function. see Checking and optionally reversing the surface normal direction and Analyzing a curve. Curve. or solid face at any position. Note: For solids. For more information. If you enter a negative offset distance. Curve. If you enter a positive offset distance. Plane/surf). see Showing and setting the back color for surface displays. Curve.¨ Curves have one normal vector that is perpendicular to the tangent line of the curve at the point of tangency. you have the option to project the curves onto offset positions of the surfaces and solids. Offset). Slice). Surface. 135 . Mastercam creates fillet surfaces on the sides of the surfaces that point in the positive normal direction unless you select the "Fillet Both Sides" option. ¨ You can verify the positive normal direction at any position on a surface. which distinguishes it from the front (positive) side. Mastercam calculates each offset surface and solid in the positive normal direction. How the surface normal direction affects your work in Mastercam ¨ When offsetting surfaces (Create. Mastercam calculates each offset surface and solid in the negative normal direction. Surface. Mastercam calculates each offset surface and solid in the positive normal direction. ¨ When projecting curves onto surfaces and solids (Create. Fillet. If you enter a positive offset distance. surface. the positive normal direction always points away from the solid volume. Mastercam offsets surfaces in the positive normal direction when the offset distance is a positive value and in the negative normal direction when the offset distance is a negative value. see Checking surface normals. Mastercam calculates each offset surface and solid in the negative normal direction. in which case Mastercam creates fillet on all sides of the surfaces. Mastercam calculates each offset surface and solid in the negative normal direction. Surface. you have the option to create the curves at an offset position of the surfaces and solids. Project). when active. and the negative normal direction points into the solid volume. For information about the Show Back function. If you enter a positive offset distance. Mastercam calculates each offset surface and solid in the positive normal direction. ¨ When creating curves at the intersections of two sets of surfaces and solids (Create. Intersect). Fillet. ¨ A check normals option is built into functions where the normal direction affects the resulting geometry so that you can check the normal direction without leaving the function. Surf/Surf) or between surfaces and a plane (Create. ¨ When creating curves at the intersection of a slice plane with surfaces and solids (Create. If you enter a negative offset distance.

Set. ¨ The surfaces in the graphic on the left are offset by a positive value. The plus sign indicates the currently selected menu option. Since the negative normal direction is outward. then choose Done. or positive. Mastercam reports the number of reversals. ¨ The surfaces in the center graphic are offset by a zero distance. Select one or more surfaces. 2. ¨ The surfaces in the graphic on the right are offset by a negative value. see About surface normals. Modify. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 1. Normal. Surfaces. Modify. each surface in this set is moved in the inward direction. 136 . Choose Main Menu. and the negative normal direction points outward from the center of the cube. Modifying surface normals The Modify Normal menu gives you options for checking and changing surface normal directions. 3. Set norms. In the prompt area. The surfaces in this set are not moved in either direction. You can perform the same function by choosing Main Menu. each forming a cube. You can access this menu by choosing Main Menu. are offset by different values. each surface in this set is moved in the outward direction. three sets of surfaces. The positive normal direction for all of the surfaces points inward toward the center of the cube. Notes: ¨ ¨ For more information about surface normals. Analyze.Example In the following example. Normal. Setting the surface normal direction upward relative to the current Cplane This function checks selected surfaces and reverses the normal direction on any surface whose outward. normal direction points downward relative to the current Cplane. Since the positive normal direction points inward.

see Reversing the surface normal direction. surface normal direction by taking one of the following actions: Choose OK to accept the direction of the normal (the outward direction). or positive. In any other construction mode. The arrow points in the outward. editing the data. Move the arrow along the surface to check the normal direction. ¨ To check the surface normal direction before reversing it. Note: To reverse the surface normal direction quickly without checking it first. Notes: ¨ For more information about surface normals.0). Mastercam calculates data using absolute. Choose Main Menu. Modify. Select a surface in the graphics window.0. then choose OK. or positive. Choose Main Menu. normal direction based on the cursor position. Reverse. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the surface. Choose Flip to reverse the direction of the normal (the outward direction).Reversing the surface normal direction 1. Modify. 3. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 2. a smaller arrowhead indicates that the normal vector points away from you. Mastercam reverses the surface normal direction. 4. 137 . coordinates relative to the system origin (0. Dynamic. or world. Checking and optionally reversing the surface normal direction 1. Normal. 2. Select a surface. Normal. 5. the system calculates data using coordinates relative to the current Cplane. When the construction plane is set to 3D. A larger arrowhead indicates that the normal vector points toward you. Mastercam displays a direction menu. click to set its position. see About surface normals. Repeat step 2 to reverse the normal direction for additional surfaces. in some cases. see Checking and optionally reversing the surface normal direction. 4. Analyzing entities The Analyze menu gives you options for viewing data about entities and. ¨ ¨ When you can see the arrow clearly. Set the outward. 3. Note: The size of the arrowhead changes to reflect the arrow’s position relative to your perspective in the current graphics view. You can access the Analyze menu by choosing Analyze from the Main Menu.

Point. Contour. data. then close the window. Analyzing chains for coordinate data 1. 3. 2. Note: Press [Alt+P] to print the data. 5. 7. Set Offset direction to Off and ignore all other options on the Analyze Contour Parameters dialog Note: This step does not apply to Mastercam Design users since the only parameters available are those pertaining to Contour type (set in step 3). Choose OK to close the dialog box. Set Offset Distance to a value other than zero. then choose Done. 7. type a comment for the report (optional). Choose Main Menu. then press [Enter]. 4.Analyzing the coordinates of a point 1. Contour. then choose Done. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Select one or more chains. 5. 3. Select one or more chains. Set Contour type to 2D to analyze the boundary for 2D data or 3D to analyze the boundary for 3D Note: Choose 3D if your selection in step 2 contained spline entities. 3. then press [Enter]. 6. In the prompt area. Analyze. View the data. In the prompt area. 2. Enter a point in the graphics window. box. Set Contour type to 2D. Set Offset direction to Left or Right. Choose Main Menu. type a comment for the report (optional). then choose OK. Analyze. Repeat step 2 to analyze additional points. Set the remaining parameters on the Analyze Contour Parameters dialog box. In the prompt area. Mastercam displays the coordinates of the point. 4. 4. 6. 138 . Analyzing chains for offset data 1. Choose Main Menu. Analyze. 2.

you must first break them into line or arc segments. Notes: ¨ ¨ To print the data. 2. In the prompt area.8. 3. Mastercam displays the coordinates of the points and the distance (2D and 3D) and angle between the points. Doing so reduces your chance of selecting the wrong entity to analyze. Analyzing the distance and angle between two points 1. Only. 139 . 2. 1. Mastercam displays data about the entity in the prompt area or in a dialog box. press [Alt+P] before closing the file in step 8. 4. Choose Main Menu. Analyzing the distance and angle between two points 1. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to analyze additional entities of the defined type. Between pts. choose Only from the Analyze Entity menu. ¨ To analyze spline entities for offset data. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 3. Analyze. Analyze. For more information. 4. Mastercam displays the coordinates of the points and the distance (2D and 3D) and angle between the points. Choose Main Menu. depending on the Edit option on the Analyze Entity menu. Repeat step 2 to analyze additional pairs of points. Select an entity. 2. Note: To redefine the type of entity to analyze. then close the window. see Breaking a spline into multiple line segments and Breaking 2D splines into arc and line segments. Choose Main Menu. Repeat step 2 to analyze additional pairs of points. 5. Enter two points in the graphics window. Between pts. Analyze. 3. Analyzing entities of a defined type You can limit the entities that are selectable by defining allowable entity types and/or attributes using the Only menu. Press [Esc] to exit the function. View the data. In the prompt area. Use the Only menu to define your selection. which is useful when you make your selection in complex geometry. Enter two points in the graphics window. Press [Esc] to exit the function. This function is not available in Mastercam Design. 4.

Analyzing the distance and angle between two points 1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Between pts.

2. Enter two points in the graphics window. In the prompt area, Mastercam displays the coordinates of the points and the distance (2D and 3D) and angle between the points. 3. 4. Repeat step 2 to analyze additional pairs of points. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Analyzing a curve, surface, or solid face at any position Mastercam displays different data depending on the type of entity you select. ¨ For lines, Mastercam displays the point and tangent coordinates.

¨ For arcs and splines, Mastercam displays the point and tangent coordinates and the radius of curvature. ¨ For surfaces and solid faces, Mastercam displays the point coordinates, the normal coordinates, and the minimum radius of curvature. 1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Dynamic.

2. Select a line, arc, spline, surface, or solid face. In the graphics window, Mastercam displays a dynamic arrow on the selected entity. 3. Use the mouse to move the base of the arrow to positions that you want to analyze on the entity. In the prompt area, Mastercam displays data relative to the arrow position. 4. 5. 6. Press [Esc] to stop analyzing the selected entity. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to analyze additional entities. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Analyzing the area/volume of entities The Analyze Area/Volume menu gives you options for analyzing the 2D area of curves, the area defined by surfaces and solid faces, and the volume defined by solid entities. You can access this menu by choosing Main Menu, Analyze, Area/volume. Analyzing 2D curve area 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Area/volume, 2D area. Select one or more closed, flat chains, then choose Done.

140

Note: Nested chains are allowed and are treated as holes whose area is subtracted from the area of the outermost boundary. Disjoint chains are not allowed. 3. Enter a value for Chord height.

Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected entities. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with the possibility of a longer processing time. 4. View the data, then choose OK to close the dialog box.

Analyzing surface and solid area 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Area/volume, Surface area. Select one or more surfaces, solids, and/or solid faces, then choose Done.

Note: For a solid, Mastercam analyzes the area of all faces associated with the solid. 3. Enter a value for Chord height.

Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected entities. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with the possibility of a longer processing time. 4. View the data, then choose OK to close the dialog box.

Analyzing solid volumes 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Area/volume, Solid props. If prompted, select a solid.

Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window, Mastercam selects it automatically. 3. View the data for Volume, then choose OK to close the dialog box.

Analyzing an entity by number Mastercam assigns a unique number to each entity in the file, which provides a useful method for referencing entities. 1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Number.

2. In the prompt area, enter the number of the entity to analyze. Mastercam displays data about the entity in the prompt area or in a dialog box, depending on the Edit option on the Analyze Entity menu. 3. To analyze additional entities by number, choose Number on the Analyze Entity menu and enter the entity number in the prompt area.

141

4.

Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Analyzing problems in chains In addition to analyzing chains for overlapping entities, direction reversals, and short entities, you can create geometry to mark problem areas, which helps you identify these areas in order to fix them. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Chain. Select one or more chains, then choose Done.

Note: To avoid missing overlapping or short entities, we recommend that you use the Window chaining method. 3. Set display options for the types of problems you want to locate in the chains, then choose OK.

4. In the prompt area, Mastercam reports the number of each type of problem it finds and highlights the problem areas in the graphics window. Press [Enter] to exit the function after reviewing the data. Analyzing surfaces The Analyze Surfaces menu gives you options for analyzing surfaces for information such as surface curvature, bad surfaces, base surfaces, downward normal directions, backups, and self-intersections. You can access this menu by choosing Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces. Analyzing surface curvature 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces, Curvature. Choose Rad limits. In the prompt area, type a value for the minimum detectable radius, then press [Enter]. Type a value for the maximum detectable radius, then press [Enter]. Choose Surfaces. Select one or more surfaces, then choose Done.

Note: To analyze all visible surfaces, skip this step. 7. Set additional parameters on the Surface Curvature Analysis menu, as needed, then choose Do it to view the curvature display.

Testing surface normals The Test Normals function analyzes the normal vector of selected surfaces and reports the number of bad surfaces whose normal vector reverses direction abruptly in one or more locations. These surfaces are inherently unstable and may present problems during machining or may be unmachinable.

142

In addition to reporting the number of bad surfaces, this function gives you the option to change the color of the surfaces, which is helpful for identifying them in the graphics window in order to fix or recreate them. When changing the color of these surfaces, Mastercam uses the main system color, as indicated on the Secondary menu. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces, Test norms. Select one or more surfaces, then choose Done.

3. Mastercam displays a window containing the number of bad surfaces in the selection. Choose OK to continue. 4. If prompted, choose Yes to change the color of bad surfaces to the current system color, which makes them easier to identify in the graphics window, or No to maintain the current color of the surfaces. Notes: ¨ Once you’ve identified bad surfaces, you can use the Analyze, Dynamic function to further analyze the direction changes. ¨ To correct a bad surface, the portion of the surface containing the direction reversal must be trimmed from the surface, if possible. Otherwise, the surface must be recreated.

Checking the display for visible base surfaces This function lets you quickly check for and optionally blank visible base surfaces in the graphics window. Note: A base surface is the untrimmed parent surface of a trimmed surface. When Mastercam trims a surface, it creates the trimmed surface as a new surface and, in most cases, blanks the base surface, which allows you to work with the new surface and does not crowd the graphics window with the associated base surface. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces, Base surfs. Choose All, Surfaces, Done.

3. Mastercam displays a window containing the number of visible base surfaces in the current file. Choose OK to close the dialog box. 4. If prompted, choose Yes to blank the base surfaces or No to maintain the base surfaces as visible surfaces.

Setting the surface normal direction upward relative to the current Cplane The Check Model function analyzes surfaces for the following conditions, which pose problems in surface machining and surface shading: self-intersections, backups, and internal sharp ridges. The Check Model function is capable of fixing backups. However, it is not capable of fixing self-intersections or internal sharp ridges. We recommend that you try to fix these conditions in the sending system before importing the file 143

into Mastercam. You can also try to fix the problems in Mastercam by trimming the self-intersection from the trimmed surface and by splitting surfaces along the ridges. See the related topics below for more information. 1. 2. 3. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces, Check model. Select one or more surfaces, then choose Done. In the prompt area, enter a self-intersection tolerance.

4. Mastercam analyzes the selected surfaces and displays a message stating the number of trimmed surfaces and the number of surfaces containing each type of problem. Choose OK to continue. 5. When problem surfaces are detected, you have the option to have Mastercam mark them in the graphics window. Doing so is helpful for identifying them in order to fix or recreate them. Follow the system prompts. Note: You have the following options for marking problem surfaces: ¨ For backups, you can change the surface color to a color that you select.

¨ For self-intersections, you can change the surface color to a color that you select. You can also create a point entity at the location where the surface crosses over itself. Mastercam creates this point using the main system color, as defined on the Secondary menu. ¨ For internal sharp ridges, you can create curves (lines, arcs, splines) along the sharp ridges. You have the option to create the curves using a color that you select or the main system color, as defined on the Secondary menu.

Checking surface models for self-intersections, backups, and internal sharp ridges The Check Model function analyzes surfaces for the following conditions, which pose problems in surface machining and surface shading: self-intersections, backups, and internal sharp ridges. The Check Model function is capable of fixing backups. However, it is not capable of fixing self-intersections or internal sharp ridges. We recommend that you try to fix these conditions in the sending system before importing the file into Mastercam. You can also try to fix the problems in Mastercam by trimming the self-intersection from the trimmed surface and by splitting surfaces along the ridges. See the related topics below for more information. 1. 2. 3. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces, Check model. Select one or more surfaces, then choose Done. In the prompt area, enter a self-intersection tolerance.

4. Mastercam analyzes the selected surfaces and displays a message stating the number of trimmed surfaces and the number of surfaces containing each type of problem. Choose OK to continue.

144

4. Mastercam creates this point using the main system color. or from the Solids Manager. 2. which can be subsequently stitched using the From Surfaces function. If errors are detected. If no errors are detected. the Check Solid dialog box redisplays and lists up to ten errors. you can create curves (lines. 2.5. Choose Perform Check. You have the option to create the curves using a color that you select or the main system color. you have the option to have Mastercam mark them in the graphics window. you may want to reimport the file with this feature turned on. Only. arcs. the Check Solid dialog box displays and lists up to ten errors. Choose Main Menu. You can also create a point entity at the location where the surface crosses over itself. On the Analyze Entity menu. You can access the Check Solids function from the Analyze Surfaces menu. splines) along the sharp ridges. Analyze. 145 . ¨ For internal sharp ridges. If no errors are detected. you can change the surface color to a color that you select. a confirming message displays. ¨ For self-intersections. Note: You have the following options for marking problem surfaces: ¨ For backups. For example. Follow the system prompts. Analyze. make sure Edit is set to Y. Checking solid models for errors The Check Solid function analyzes solids for error conditions that may pose problems in solid modeling operations. Select a solid entity in the graphics window. Solids. Choose Check Solid. Check Solid. from the Analyze Solid dialog box. This function is particularly useful for analyzing the integrity of imported solids and identifying entities that you may need to repair or reconstruct. Doing so is helpful for identifying them in order to fix or recreate them. with file formats in which healing during import is supported. The Check Solid dialog box displays. Choose Main Menu. 3. Checking solids from the Analyze Surfaces menu 1. as defined on the Secondary menu. a confirming message displays. If errors are detected. you can change the surface color to a color that you select. Or you may use the Remove Faces function to remove faces having problems identified by the Check Solid function in order to reconstruct new surfaces. When problem surfaces are detected. The Analyze Solid dialog box displays. as defined on the Secondary menu. Checking solids from the Analyze Solid dialog box 1. This function identifies and describes specific errors and highlights their location in the solid drawing. Surfaces. 3. Select a solid entity in the graphics window.

Analyze. then choose Done. Choose Main Menu. 3. If errors are detected. then choose Check Solid.Checking solids from the Solids Manager 1. 3. Disjoint chains are not allowed. 2. Enter a value for Chord height. 2. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with the possibility of a longer processing time. Analyzing entity and attribute data 1. 4. Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected entities. 146 . Right-click on the selected solid. ¨ If ten errors are listed. Choose Unzoom to return the graphics window to the original display scale. area. a confirming message displays. Note: Nested chains are allowed and are treated as holes whose area is subtracted from the area of the outermost boundary. Creating a point at the center of gravity of a 2D curve boundary 1. Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. Analyze. Mastercam displays the data in a dialog box. If no errors are detected. 2. flat chains. Some of the data may be editable. Solids. Choose Zoom to selected item to magnify the selected error in the graphics window. Notes on managing error display When errors are listed in the Check Solid dialog box: ¨ ¨ ¨ Select a listed error to highlight its location in the graphics window. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Repeat step 2 to analyze additional entities. 3. Select one or more closed. the Check Solid dialog box displays and lists up to ten errors. Select a solid in the list. Select an entity in the graphics window. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. 2D area. Area/volume. Mastercam displays data about the entity in the prompt Note: If the Edit option on the Analyze Entity menu is set to Y. Choose Main Menu. you can reset Maximum number of errors to a higher value (default is 10) and choose Perform Check see if there are more detectable errors. Choose Main Menu.

2. Choose Main Menu. 2D area. Creating a point at the moment of inertia about X. Check Create Pt (Center of Gravity). about X. Note: Nested chains are allowed and are treated as holes whose area is subtracted from the area of the outermost boundary. Area/volume. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with the possibility of a longer processing time. Check Create Pt (Moment of Inertia. Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected entities. 2. Select one or more closed. flat chains. Choose Main Menu. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with the possibility of a longer processing time. Note: Nested chains are allowed and are treated as holes whose area is subtracted from the area of the outermost boundary. Area/volume. 4. Disjoint chains are not allowed.Y). about CG). Choose OK to close the dialog box and create the point. Enter a value for Chord height. Choose Main Menu. Creating a point at the moment of inertia about the center of gravity of a 2D curve boundary 1. 2D area.4. 2. then choose Done. Select one or more closed. Disjoint chains are not allowed. 2D area. Choose OK to close the dialog box and create the point. then choose Done. 3. Enter a value for Chord height. Analyze. flat chains. Choose OK to close the dialog box and create the point. flat chains. Disjoint chains are not allowed. Analyze. Area/volume. Note: Nested chains are allowed and are treated as holes whose area is subtracted from the area of the outermost boundary. then choose Done. Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected entities. Analyze. 5. Analyzing 2D curve area 1. Check Create Pt (Moment of Inertia. 5. 4. 3. 147 .Y of a 2D curve boundary 1. 5. Select one or more closed.

Select one or more surfaces. then choose OK to close the dialog box. Enter a value for Chord height. Enter a value for Chord height. 4. Analyze. 2. Mastercam displays the point and tangent coordinates. Analyze. or solid face at any position Mastercam displays different data depending on the type of entity you select. View the data. Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected entities. Area/volume. surface.3. then choose Done. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. ¨ For arcs and splines. solids. Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected entities. ¨ For lines. Choose Main Menu. select a solid. If prompted. 2. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with the possibility of a longer processing time. Analyzing surface and solid area 1. Mastercam displays the point and tangent coordinates and the radius of curvature. 148 . 3. then choose OK to close the dialog box. Mastercam analyzes the area of all faces associated with the solid. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with the possibility of a longer processing time. and the minimum radius of curvature. View the data. Analyzing solid volumes 1. Mastercam displays the point coordinates. Dynamic. the normal coordinates. View the data for Volume. Choose Main Menu. Solid props. 1. and/or solid faces. Surface area. Analyze. Area/volume. Note: For a solid. ¨ For surfaces and solid faces. Analyzing a curve. 3. Mastercam selects it automatically. Choose Main Menu. then choose OK to close the dialog box. 4.

3. select a solid. Choose OK to close the dialog box. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam selects it automatically. Creating a point at a solid's center of gravity 1. Mastercam selects it automatically. If prompted. Select a line. 4.2. If prompted. Calculating a solid's mass 1. Area/volume. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to analyze additional entities. 3. Mastercam displays a dynamic arrow on the selected entity. Choose Main Menu. Area/volume. Set Density. arc. Choose OK to close the dialog box. Analyze. 2. Calculating a solid's moment of inertia about a selected axis line 1. Solid props. Enter a value for Density. Area/volume. Use the mouse to move the base of the arrow to positions that you want to analyze on the entity. 4. Mastercam displays the solid’s moment of inertia relative to the selected line and density. In the prompt area. If prompted. 2. Press [Esc] to stop analyzing the selected entity. In the graphics window. 149 . 2. Choose OK to close the dialog box and create the point. Solid props. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. Check Create Pt. 5. select a solid. 4. Press [Esc] to exit the function. then choose Axis Line. In the field next to the Axis Line button. Analyze. Mastercam updates the value for Mass. Mastercam displays data relative to the arrow position. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. Mastercam selects it automatically. select a solid. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. 3. 5. 6. 4. 3. Choose Main Menu. Solid props. or solid face. surface. Select a line in the graphics window. spline. Analyze.

Select a line. Select a line. 7. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. 2. 3. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 4. 5. 5. Choose Main Menu. 7. 2. toggle it to Y. toggle it to Y. Press [Esc] to exit the function. if necessary. then press [Enter]. 4. Choose OK to close the dialog box. Enter XYZ coordinates for Endpoint 1 or Endpoint 2. 2. Repeat step 4 for the other endpoint. Enter XYZ coordinates or choose Move and enter a point in the graphics window Choose OK to close the dialog box. 5. 3. Type a value for Length. or choose Move and enter a point in the graphics window. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. Analyze. Editing the length of a line 1. In the graphics window. 6. Choose Main Menu. select the line at the endpoint where you want the length change to be calculated. 6.Editing the position of a point 1. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. Analyze. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 150 . Editing the position of a line 1. 4. 6. toggle it to Y. 3. Choose OK to close the dialog box. Choose Main Menu. Select a point. Analyze.

Press [Esc] to exit the function. Mastercam calculates the length from the arc’s ending point. Enter a value for 3D Length. then choose OK. Select an arc. Mastercam calculates the angle from the arc’s ending point.Editing the construction view of an arc The construction view is the plane that the arc was constructed on (Cplane). 4. 5. Choose OK to close the dialog box. Choose Main Menu. Press [Esc] to exit the function. then choose OK. ¨ Enter an angle value for Startpoint and/or Endpoint or choose the corresponding Move button and enter a point in the graphics window. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. 4. Enter a Radius or Diameter value. 3. 1. Select an arc. Choose Main Menu. 6. Select an arc. 5. Analyze. Press [Esc] to exit the function. toggle it to Y. 3. Change the sweep of the arc by taking one of the following actions: Enter an angle value for Sweep. Analyze. 4. Editing the sweep of an arc 1. toggle it to Y. 2. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. 151 . Analyze. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. toggle it to Y. Enter a View number. Editing the size of an arc 1. 2. 5. 2. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. 3.

6. 3. Press [Enter] to continue. Enter a value for Allowable Error. If prompted. Choose OK to exit the dialog box. 4. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Mastercam displays the number of node points removed from the spline. 8. 6. In the prompt area. choose Yes to save the spline with the reduced number of control points or No to maintain the original spline. In the prompt area. Enter a value for Allowable Error. 2. 6. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Select a NURBS spline. Press [Enter] to continue. At the prompt. choose Yes to save the spline with the reduced number of node points or No to maintain the original spline. then choose Reduce It. 4. 7. Reducing the amount of data stored for a NURBS spline 1. Choose Main Menu. Select an arc. toggle it to Y. Analyze. then choose Reduce It. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. Analyze. 3. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. 5. toggle it to Y. 5. Choose OK to close the dialog box. 2. Choose Main Menu. Choose Main Menu. toggle it to Y. Enter Center XYZ coordinates. or choose Move and enter a point in the graphics window. Mastercam displays the number of control points removed from the spline.Editing the position of an arc 1. 4. Reducing the amount of data stored for a parametric spline 1. 152 . 3. Analyze. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. 2. 5. Select a parametric spline.

then press [Esc] to set the point. 9. then press [Esc].7. 2. toggle it to Y. Choose OK to close the dialog box. choose Keep Tan for one or both endpoints before choosing Move Node. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to move additional node points. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 7. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. Analyze. Choose Main Menu. Select a parametric spline. Choose OK to close the dialog box. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. Choose Flatten. 4. Analyze. Press [Esc] to exit the function. then press [Esc] to return to the dialog box. Note: To maintain the tangency of the spline’s endpoints. 8. Note: The selected node point sets the depth of the flattened spline. 5. Select a 3D parametric spline. Choose Move Node. toggle it to Y. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Select a node point on the spline. Select a node point. Mastercam displays the message shown below. Choose OK to close the dialog box. 2. 3. 4. 6. Modifying the position of a node point 1. Choose Main Menu. Flattening a 3D parametric spline 1. 3. 6. Choosing No tells Mastercam that you want to move the endpoint. Choosing Yes tells Mastercam that you want to move the startpoint. 7. 5. Enter a point for the new node position. 8. 153 . Note: If you select the start/endpoint of a closed spline.

toggle it to Y. Press [Esc] to exit the function. 3. Select a curve-generated revolved surface. 5. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. Press [Esc] to exit the function. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. 4. Editing the sweep of a revolved surface 1. Editing the angle of a draft surface 1. 5. Analyze. toggle it to Y. toggle it to Y. then choose OK. 4. Choose Main Menu. 5. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Choose Main Menu. Select an offset surface. Select a curve-generated draft surface. 3. then choose OK. 4.Editing the offset distance of a surface 1. Select a curve-generated draft surface. Analyze. Enter an Angle value. Analyze. toggle it to Y. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. Enter a 3D Length value. Mastercam calculates the angle from the surface’s end angle. ¨ Choose Main Menu. Choose Main Menu. Enter an Offset distance value. Change the sweep of the surface by taking one of the following actions: Enter an angle value for Sweep. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu. 154 . 2. 2. Analyze. 3. 2. 3. then choose OK. 4. 2. Editing the length of a draft surface 1.

It runs each entity through the regeneration process. Accessing the Drafting menu also puts you in SmartMode. associated and nonassociated. ¨ Validate. Create. You can access the Drafting menu by choosing Main Menu. leader lines. Enter an angle value for Start Angle and/or End Angle. Drafting. Press [Esc] to exit the function. Creating and editing drafting entities The Drafting menu gives you options for creating and editing drafting entities: dimensions. and edit a variety of drafting entities. The Regenerate menu gives you the following options for regenerating associated drafting entities: ¨ Automatic. You can use this option when automatic regeneration is turned off (e. In particular. Choosing this option lets you regenerate all associated drafting entities at a particular time. Create. However. 6. the associated dimension’s value changes accordingly. Regenerate. Choosing this option lets you regenerate all drafting entities.. create. the associated dimension moves with it.g.g." A status of "dirty" means that the position and/or value of the associated entity no longer matches its geometry. witness lines. where you can select. 155 . You can use this option when automatic regeneration is turned off (e. trim) an arc so that a dimensioned quadrant point is no longer valid. Drafting. notes.. When you move an entity. recreating or reformatting the entity to Mastercam standards. ¨ Select. you can also set or edit drafting parameters that affect drafting entities you select or create..g. Regenerating the drafting entity updates its position and/or value so that they once again match the geometry. Choose OK to close the dialog box. Only associated drafting entities can be regenerated. Dirty drafting entities are highlighted in red. ¨ If you modify (e.¨ 5. Choosing this option lets you select associated drafting entities to regenerate at a particular time. you can validate both associated and non-associated drafting entities. Drafting menu options Regenerating associated drafting entities When you create associated drafting entities. and hatch entities. Turning on this option tells Mastercam to regenerate associated drafting entities automatically. regenerating an associated dimension means that: ¨ ¨ When you resize an entity. labels. Mastercam prompts you to convert the dimension to a radius/diameter format or to dissociate it. whenever a change in geometry requires it. You can access the Regenerate menu by choosing Main Menu. during periods of intensive editing). changing the size or position of geometry changes the status of associated drafting entities from "clean" to "dirty. In addition to creating or editing specific drafting entities. during periods of intensive editing) ¨ All.

Creating drafting dimensions Mastercam provides two menus for creating drafting dimensions: the Drafting menu (SmartMode) and the Dimension menu. ¨ Drafting menu (SmartMode). The Drafting menu, when displayed, puts you into SmartMode, an integrated drafting environment where you can create all dimensions except baseline, chained, or ordinate. You can also create other entities such as notes, labels, leaders, and hatch entities from the Drafting menu. To access the Drafting menu, choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting. When to use. Because of its flexibility in allowing you to create or edit many different kinds of drafting entities, you will usually find it more convenient and efficient (fewer mouse clicks) to create dimensions (except baseline, chained, or ordinate) in SmartMode than from the Dimension menu—especially when you are creating or editing different types of dimensions in succession. You must use SmartMode to create perpendicular dimensions, which cannot be created from the Dimension menu. ¨ Dimension menu. The Dimension menu gives you options for creating specific types of dimensions. You can use the Dimension menu to create all dimensions except perpendicular. To access the Dimension menu, choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension. Then choose the option (Horizontal, Vertical, etc.) that corresponds to the dimension you want to create. When to use. If you are creating multiple instances of a particular dimension type (horizontal, vertical, etc.), you may find it more efficient to choose that option from the Dimension menu than to create the dimension in SmartMode. You must use the Dimension menu to create baseline, chained, and ordinate dimensions, as these dimensions cannot be created in SmartMode (from the Drafting menu). Note: You cannot select, reposition, or edit existing dimensions from the Dimension menu. Instead, display the Drafting menu, then use SmartMode and the Quick Edit options to select, reposition, and edit dimensions you wish to change.

Creating dimensions in SmartMode (Drafting menu)
Selecting drafting entities in SmartMode SmartMode is an integrated drafting environment, in which you can create different dimensions as well as select and edit existing dimensions and drafting entities. In this environment, the geometric or drafting entities you select activate the appropriate drafting function, allowing you to create or edit drafting entities, as summarized in the following table and the notes below. Notes: ¨ Selecting an existing drafting entity in SmartMode lets you edit that drafting entity, even if the entity was not created in SmartMode (e.g., a baseline, chained, or ordinate dimension, a note, or a label). ¨ To activate the point dimension function in SmartMode, the Display in SmartMode parameter must be turned on (checked) in the Dimension Text tab of the Drafting Globals dialog box. You can, however, select and edit an existing point dimension in SmartMode.

156

Creating dimensions in SmartMode: Overview As a dynamic environment for creating drafting dimensions, SmartMode allows you to create point, linear (horizontal, vertical, perpendicular, or tangent), angular, and circular, dimensions depending on the points or entities you select and the sequence in which you select them. The following table summarizes the selection sequences you can use to create dimensions in SmartMode.

Note: To create point dimensions in SmartMode, the Display in SmartMode parameter must be turned on (checked) in the Dimension Text tab of the Drafting Globals dialog box.

157

Creating linear dimensions in SmartMode In SmartMode, you can create horizontal, vertical, or parallel linear dimensions for selected entities in the graphics window. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting. Enter two points or select a line.

Note: Before entering a point, you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. 3. Drag the dimension text in different directions to display available linear dimension types: horizontal, vertical, or parallel. (If you are dragging a dimension associated with a horizontal or vertical line, its type is locked by default.) Note: While dragging the dimension text, you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension. 4. While the desired dimension type is displayed, press and hold the left mouse button (or choose Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the dimension’s current type.

158

5. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then release (or click) the mouse button to set its position. Note: You can also create horizontal, vertical, and parallel dimensions from the Dimension menu. Creating horizontal dimensions (Dimension menu) Choosing the Horizontal option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more horizontal dimensions. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Horizontal. Enter two points or select a line.

Note: Before entering a point, you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. 3. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then click to set its position.

Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. 4. 5. Notes: ¨ Choosing the Quick Edit un(L)ock option, when available, allows the dimension to change type (horizontal, vertical, parallel), as you drag the dimension text. ¨ You can also create and edit horizontal dimensions in SmartMode. Creating vertical dimensions (Dimension menu) Choosing the Vertical option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more vertical dimensions. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Vertical. Enter two points or select a line. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional horizontal dimensions, as needed. Press [Esc] to exit the Horizontal dimension function.

Note: Before entering a point, you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. 3. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then click to set its position.

Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. 4. 5. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional vertical dimensions, as needed. Press [Esc] to exit the Vertical dimension function.

159

Notes: ¨ Choosing the Quick Edit un(L)ock option, when available, allows the dimension to change type (horizontal, vertical, parallel), as you drag the dimension text. ¨ You can also create and edit vertical dimensions in SmartMode. Creating parallel dimensions (Dimension menu) Choosing the Parallel option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more parallel dimensions. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Parallel. Enter two points or select a line.

Note: Before entering a point, you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. 3. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then click to set its position.

Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. 4. 5. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional parallel dimensions, as needed. Press [Esc] to exit the Parallel dimension function.

Creating perpendicular dimensions in SmartMode Perpendicular dimensions measure the perpendicular distance between any of the following: ¨ ¨ ¨ A point and a line Two points and a parallel line Two parallel lines

In SmartMode, you can create perpendicular linear dimensions for selected entities in the graphics window. 1. 2. ¨ ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting. Select either: One point and a line Two points and a parallel line Two parallel lines

160

you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension. you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. Creating angular dimensions in SmartMode In SmartMode. relative to the selected lines or points.Note: Before entering a point. Auto Center must be turned off while the dimension is locked. 2. whose angular dimension you wish to display. 3. Select either: Two non-parallel lines Three points (first point selected become the vertex) * A line and two points. Drafting. Drag the dimension in different directions to display available perpendicular dimensions for the selected points and/or lines. 4. see Creating angular dimensions (Dimension menu). While the dimension is in the desired quadrant. press and hold the left mouse button (or choose Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the dimension into the current quadrant. you can create angular dimensions for selected entities. 5. 4. Note: To drag the dimension text outside of its quadrant.) Note: Before entering a point. 1. For an example and detailed information about angular dimensions. press and hold the left mouse button (or choose Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the current dimension. you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension. (To select the two points you must first choose the Quick Edit Point mode option while dragging the linear dimension associated with the first line selected. then release (or click) the mouse button to save the position. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. Create. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. Drag the dimension into the quadrant. 161 . You can add connecting tails out-of quadrant text by checking the Add tail to angular leaders parameter in the Witness/Leaders/Arrows tab of the Drafting Globals dialog box. Note: While dragging the dimension text. 5. Note: While dragging the dimension text. then release (or click) the mouse button to save the position. While the desired perpendicular dimension is displayed. 3. * * Choose Main Menu.

as follows: ¨ ¨ ¨ If you selected a circle. you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. you can create circular dimensions for selected entities. Creating tangent dimensions in SmartMode In SmartMode. Drafting. or vertical. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. Note: While dragging the dimension text. For an example and detailed information about circular dimensions. see Tangent dimensions. press and hold the left mouse button (or choose Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the dimension’s current type. If you selected an existing circular dimension. Create. 1. 4. 2. Select either: A circle (or two points on the same circle) An arc (or two points on the same arc) Note: Before entering a point. choose the Quick Edit (R)ad or (D)ia options. Create. horizontal. 5. For an example and detailed information about tangent dimensions. or vertical) is displayed. see Creating circular dimensions (Dimension menu). Select either: A point and an arc/circle A line and an arc/circle 162 . If you selected an arc (<360 degrees). you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension. To change the measured dimension between diameter and radius. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. you can create tangent dimensions for selected entities. 1. horizontal. the dimension’s last specified style is displayed. While the desired dimension type (circular. Note: The default dimension depends on the selected object. 3. Drafting. a radius dimension is displayed. a diameter dimension is displayed.Creating circular dimensions in SmartMode In SmartMode. 6. 2. Drag the dimension in different directions to display available dimension types: circular. then release (or click) the mouse button to save the position.

you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. 163 . Enter two points or select a line. press and hold the left mouse button (or choose Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the dimension’s current type. Choose Main Menu. then release (or click) the mouse button to save the position. 4. Note: While dragging the dimension text. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. 2. 3. Create. Drafting. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. Enter a point Note: Before entering a point. 1. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional point dimensions. Choose Main Menu. you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. see Creating point dimensions (Dimension menu). the Display in SmartMode parameter must be turned on (checked) in the Dimension Text tab of the Drafting Globals dialog box. 3. Drafting. Horizontal. 4. you can create point dimensions for selected entities. For an example and detailed information about point dimensions. horizontal) and tangent points. Dimension. Note: To enable the point dimension function in SmartMode. then click to set its position. The following example shows a horizontal dimension: Choosing the Horizontal option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more horizontal dimensions. as needed. you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension. While the desired tangent dimension is displayed. Creating dimensions from the Dimension menu Creating horizontal dimensions (Dimension menu) Horizontal dimensions are linear dimensions that measure the horizontal distance between two points. 2. Create. Creating point dimensions in SmartMode In SmartMode. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. 5. 1.¨ Two arc/circles 3. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. then click to set its position. Note: Before entering a point. Drag the dimension in different directions to display available dimension types (vertical.

Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. Creating parallel dimensions (Dimension menu) Parallel dimensions are linear dimensions that measure the actual distance between two points and are parallel to the axis that runs between the two points. 1. you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. The following example shows a vertical dimension: Choosing the Vertical option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more vertical dimensions. as needed. The following example shows a parallel dimension: Choosing the Parallel option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more parallel dimensions. Press [Esc] to exit the Horizontal dimension function. as needed. 1. ¨ You can also create and edit horizontal dimensions in SmartMode. Note: Before entering a point. Create. Notes: ¨ Choosing the Quick Edit un(L)ock option. 4. Note: Before entering a point. 3. Drafting. Dimension. 4. Drafting. 5. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. Press [Esc] to exit the Vertical dimension function. Parallel. when available. 164 . Enter two points or select a line. 5. Enter two points or select a line. Choose Main Menu.Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional vertical dimensions. Creating vertical dimensions (Dimension menu) Vertical dimensions are linear dimensions that measure the vertical distance between two points. Choose Main Menu. allows the dimension to change type (horizontal. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional horizontal dimensions. 3. then click to set its position. 2. 2. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. parallel). Vertical. you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. Create. vertical. Dimension. then click to set its position. as you drag the dimension text.

and vice-versa. Choosing the Baseline option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more series of baseline dimensions. or zero distance. Choose Main Menu. Drafting. Note: You can drag the dimension text and use the Quick Edit options only if the Baseline Increments: Automatic parameter is not checked in the Settings tab of the Drafting Globals dialog box. repeat steps 2–6 to create another set of baseline dimensions using a different linear dimension. Enter a point for the second endpoint of the first baseline dimension that you want to create. Dimension. then click to set its position. 4. Depending on your drafting settings (Settings tab in the Drafting Globals dialog box). 2. Press [Esc] to exit the Parallel dimension function. 6. If desired. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to create additional baseline dimensions using the same linear dimension. Create.Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. the linked baseline dimensions inherit that associativity. When you create a series of baseline dimensions. 1. which serves as a "base" line. 8. Creating baseline dimensions Baseline dimensions are linear dimensions that reference an existing linear dimension. If Baseline Increments: Automatic is checked. where you enter the endpoint for the first baseline dimension determines which witness line of the base dimension serves as the reference entity for all subsequent baseline dimensions in the series. If you enter a point to the right of the original dimension’s midpoint. Mastercam uses the witness line to the left as the reference entity. 4. The Point Entry menu displays. Press [Esc] to complete the current baseline dimension series. you can set baseline dimensions at pre-determined increments or in a position you choose. 7. 5. Baseline. Press [Esc] to exit the baseline dimension function. the dimension is set at the fixed baseline increment as soon as you enter the endpoint (step 3). 5. Select a linear dimension to be the base. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional parallel dimensions. as needed. If the original (base) dimension is associated to a geometric entity. 165 . 3. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window.

This dimension is used as a "base. Chained. 3. 5. Dimension. Drafting. The Point Entry menu displays. The format of a circular dimension can be linear (horizontal or vertical) or radius/diameter (rotating)." a radius/diameter (rotating) dimension is drawn. Where you enter the endpoint for the new dimension determines which witness line of the previous dimension becomes the new dimension’s reference entity. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to chain each new dimension to the previous one.Creating chained dimensions Chained dimensions are linear dimensions that build on one another. You can position the dimension text inside or outside the arc. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. Create. Mastercam uses the previous dimension’s right witness line as the first witness line of the new dimension. Press [Esc] to exit the chained dimension function. becomes the base for the next dimension in the chain. ¨ Inside the arc or circle or outside any of the four 45-degree "quadrants. the dimension type and/or format changes (unless it is locked) as follows: ¨ ¨ To the right and left of the arc or circle. Choosing the Chained option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more sets of chained dimensions. While you drag a circular dimension. Above and below the arc or circle. depending on the position to which you drag the dimension. even if the original base dimension selected for the chain is associated. Select a linear dimension. Choosing the Circular option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more circular dimensions. a vertical dimension is drawn. Press [Esc] to complete the current chain. Chained dimensions are not associated with a geometric entity. 1. 8. 4. and vice versa. If you enter a point to the right of the previous dimension’s midpoint. 166 ." or zero distance for the first chained dimension. When you create each new dimension in a chain. Each chained dimension. in turn. Creating circular dimensions (Dimension menu) Circular dimensions measure the diameter or the radius of arcs and circles. Choose Main Menu. 6. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. Enter a point for the second endpoint of the first chained dimension that you want to create. beginning with the selection of an existing linear dimension. 7. Mastercam calculates the midpoint of the previously entered dimension. then click to set its position. a horizontal dimension is drawn. 2. Repeat steps 2–6 to create another set of chained dimensions using a different linear dimension.

Create. Note: While dragging the dimension text. specify an angle (0 to 180 degrees) in the prompt area. two points and a line. Creating angular dimensions (Dimension menu) Angular dimensions measure the angle formed by: two non-parallel lines. or vertical. While the desired dimension type or format (radius/diameter. Repeat steps 2–5 to create additional circular dimensions. a radius dimension is displayed. you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension. Enter a point. Note: While dragging the dimension text. horizontal. three points. Circular. Create. ¨ Select a line. then Release (or click) the mouse button to set its position. Mastercam displays the dimension. Dimension. and press [Enter]. While the desired quadrant is displayed. 167 . 3. 2. Angular dimensions from three points can be created only in SmartMode. ¨ Choose Main Menu. Angular. or vertical) is displayed. press and hold the left mouse button (or choose Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the dimension type. 6. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. 5. 3. Press [Esc] to exit the circular dimension function. Drag the dimension in different directions to display available quadrants. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu. a diameter dimension is displayed. 4. Drafting. then choose Relative from the Angular dimension menu to display the Point Entry menu. The following example shows an angular dimension: Choosing the Angular option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more angular dimensions. Do either of the following: Select two non-parallel lines. 7.1. Dimension. horizontal. Choosing the Quick Edit (R)ad or (D)ia options changes the measured dimension between diameter and radius. 1. Select an arc or a circle. 2. or a line and a horizon (a virtual line defined by specifying an angle relative to the X axis of the Cplane). as follows: If you selected a circle. as needed. press and hold the left mouse button (or choose Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the quadrant. If you selected an arc (<360 degrees). Drag the dimension in different directions to display available types and formats: circular. you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension. 4. Drafting.

Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. all children of that dimension become dirty as well. 7. 3. 6. from a common base point. Create. along the X axis of the current Cplane. However. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. Repeat steps 2-4 to create additional tangent dimensions. Dimension. Drafting. if a change in geometry causes an associated base ordinate dimension to become dirty. Mastercam calculates its distance from the base dimension to determine its text value. The Ordinate Dimension menu gives you options for creating ordinate dimensions. The following example shows a horizontal ordinate dimension. Creating horizontal ordinate dimensions Horizontal ordinate dimensions measure the horizontal distance. You can access the Ordinate Dimension menu by choosing Main Menu. Select a point.0000. select an arc/circle. select a point. ¨ ¨ 4. While non-linear in format. For examples and information about creating and using tangent dimensions. Repeat steps 2 – 5 to create additional angular dimensions. Do either of the following: If you selected a point or a line in step 2. Drafting. then Release (or click) the mouse button to set its position. Press [Esc] to exit the tangent dimension function. ordinate dimensions can display tolerances. or another arc/circle. Creating tangent dimensions (Dimension menu) Choosing the Tangent option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more tangent dimensions. 6. or zero distance. Choose Main Menu. as needed. line.5. The base dimension is an initial ordinate dimension that you create or select and whose position Mastercam designates as 0. Create. Press [Esc] to exit the angular dimension function. For each child dimension. Ordinate dimensions are composed of a base (also referred to as a "parent") dimension and one or more secondary (also referred to as "child") dimensions. Base or child ordinate dimensions may be associated with geometry independently of each other. as needed. Creating ordinate dimensions Ordinate dimensions are non-linear dimensions that measure distance from a common base dimension. 168 . or arc/circle. see Tangent dimensions. If you selected an arc/circle in step 2. Dimension. 1. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. then click to set its position. 5. Tangent. line. Ordinate. 2.

Choose Main Menu. Press [Esc] to exit the horizontal ordinate dimension function. Drafting. Dimension. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional ordinate (child) dimensions. Dimension. Enter a point. Create. Horizontal. The Point Entry menu displays. For the initial ordinate dimension.Choosing the Horizontal option from the Ordinate Dimension menu lets you create one or more horizontal ordinate dimensions. For the initial ordinate dimension. this base point is 0. 1. then click to set its position. this base point is 0. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. The Point Entry menu displays.0000. as needed. 4. 169 . Vertical. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. 2. Drafting.0000. Enter a point. Ordinate. 1. Creating vertical ordinate dimensions Choosing the Vertical option from the Ordinate Dimension menu lets you create one or more vertical ordinate dimensions. Ordinate. 2. 3. Choose Main Menu. 5. Create.

then drag/edit and position the dimension text. 5. 170 . 1. The Point Entry menu displays. 5.0000. Create. Adding ordinate dimensions to an existing base dimension Choosing the Existing option from the Ordinate Dimension menu lets you add secondary. then click to set its position.3. For each additional ordinate (child) dimension you wish to create. enter a point. 3. 2. Choose Main Menu. Enter two points: the first defines the initial ordinate dimension (0. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. Press [Esc] to exit the vertical ordinate dimension function. or child.0000). the second defines the dimension orientation. ordinate dimensions to an existing ordinate base dimension that you select and which Mastercam designates as 0. Ordinate. Creating parallel ordinate dimensions Choosing the Parallel option from the Ordinate Dimension menu lets you create one or more parallel ordinate dimensions. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. Press [Esc] to exit the parallel ordinate dimension function. Dimension. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional ordinate (child) dimensions. 4. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. then click to set its position. as described in step 3. 4. Drafting. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. Parallel. as needed.

as needed. then choose Done. Select an existing base ordinate dimension (0. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. Entry is required. 6. Type coordinates for the base point (0. Under Points. child dimensions are associated with the base. Choose Main Menu. 3. Ordinate. then click to set its position. 6. check or clear parameters. Existing. splines. 1. 4. Select entities to dimension from the Entity Selection menu. Once you set a base point and other dimension parameters. Dimension. 2. Choose OK. 3. The Ordinate Dimension: Automatic dialog box opens. however. and surface curves. as desired. ¨ ¨ Check one or both of the following (you must check at least one): Horizontal to create horizontal ordinate dimensions Vertical to create vertical ordinate dimensions 4.0000). Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window.0000) in the X and Y text boxes. Create. Creating multiple ordinate dimensions automatically Choosing the Window option from the Ordinate Dimension menu opens a dialog box that lets you create multiple sets of ordinate dimensions from a common origin (base point) based on parameters that you set for entities that you select. Press [Esc] to exit the existing ordinate dimension function. and/or the endpoints of lines. Using this method can save time by letting you create many ordinate dimensions at once while eliminating the need to enter individual points. Choose Main Menu. Dimension. Mastercam automatically creates a base (parent) dimension and all possible child dimensions relative to this point based on the selected parameters and entities. or choose Select to enter a base point by clicking in the graphics window. 2. Window. 5. Ordinate. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to create additional ordinate dimensions. Enter a point for an additional ordinate dimension. to achieve desired dimension format. 171 . the endpoints of arcs. Under Options. 7. Drafting.1. 5. You have the option to create horizontal and/or vertical ordinate dimensions. Create. You can create dimensions at the center points of arcs. Ordinate dimensions created using this method are not associated with any geometry. Drafting. check one or more options (you must check at least one) to specify what kinds of points to dimension.

Create. then click to set its position and exit the Align function. Press [Esc] to exist the point dimension function. you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu and access additional point entry options. However. reposition. you can use the Quick Edit (A)lign option to move a selected ordinate dimension independently from the others. as needed. 2. Choose Main Menu. Ordinate. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional point dimensions. Point. Dimension. Aligning ordinate dimensions can improve neatness in a drawing while highlighting their relatedness. Choose Main Menu. Drafting. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. 5. 1. The text of all related ordinate elements snaps into alignment and moves together. then click to set its position. Enter a point. 172 . Drafting. Align. The Note dialog box opens. Drafting. Creating a drafting note You can create a drafting note by choosing the Note option from the Drafting menu. 3. 4. Choose Main Menu. Dimension. 2. Create. Creating point dimensions (Dimension menu) Point dimensions identify the coordinates for any given position in the graphics window. 3. Select and drag an existing ordinate dimension (base or child).Aligning ordinate dimensions Choosing the Align option from the Ordinate Dimension menu lets you select. Create. 1. if aligning the ordinate dimensions interferes with other entities in the drawing. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window. 1. and align the text of all related ordinate dimensions along a common axis. Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position. Note: Before entering a point. Note. The following example shows a point dimension: Choosing the Point option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more point dimensions.

straight drafting lines (no arrowheads) used to indicate boundaries or connect entities. then click Open. You can create freestanding witness lines anywhere in the graphics window. Choose Main Menu. drag and position each additional note copy. You can also create freestanding witness lines by choosing Witness from the Drafting menu. The Point Entry menu displays. etc. 5. Unless you turn off the display of witness lines (Drafting Globals dialog box). unformatted) you wish enter. Creating freestanding witness lines Witness lines are simple. In dimensions. The following example shows witness lines in a dimension. 4. Witness. The Note dialog box closes. press [Enter] to create line or paragraph breaks. Choose OK. If you selected Multiple Notes in step 3. Drag the note text to a desired position in the graphics window. ¨ ¨ Select either of the following: Single Note to create one instance of the note. Locate and select a file containing the text (ASCII. such as midpoints. Click Load File to open the Specify File Name to Read dialog box. If desired. Mastercam creates witness lines automatically when you create dimensions. ¨ Symbol. witness lines are paired parallel lines that indicate the end points of a dimension. Freestanding witness lines can be associated with the geometry selected during their creation or by entering points relative to an entity. then click the symbol you wish to enter. Create. 173 . Note: You can choose Properties to edit the note’s text properties using the Drafting Globals dialog box. Click Add Symbol to open the Select Symbol dialog box. ¨ File. quadrant points. 1. then press [Esc] to exit the Note function. Type the text directly into the Note text box. center points.2. 3. Multiple Notes to create multiple copies of the same note. Enter note text in one or more of the following ways: ¨ Key In. endpoints. Drafting. then click to set its position.

To get settings from a file. endpoints. quadrant points. 3. 1. Press [Esc]. center points. Create. Mastercam creates leader lines automatically when you create dimensions. Enter two points. from an entity. Drafting. You can use this option to create single or segmented leader lines. The following example shows a leader line in a dimension: You can also create freestanding leader lines by choosing the Leader option from the Drafting menu. Leader lines are also used with note text to create labels. Select one or more entities that you want to edit. as needed. Multi edit. then choose Done. In Mastercam. select the Settings tab and choose one of the following options: ¨ ¨ ¨ Get globals from disk file Get globals from entity Get default globals 174 . Create. 1. 2. The Point Entry menu displays. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional single or segmented leaders. Editing global parameters for selected drafting entities Choosing the Multi Edit option on the Drafting menu lets you use the Drafting Globals dialog box to edit parameters for one or more drafting entities that you select. Repeat step 2 to create additional witness lines. 3. or from the system defaults. The Drafting Globals dialog box opens. such as midpoints. Mastercam creates a leader line connecting all entered points. Choose Main Menu. Press [Esc] when done. as needed. leader lines most often point from a dimension’s text to its witness lines. Creating freestanding leader lines Leader lines are drafting lines with single arrowheads that function as pointers. Leader. enter two points to create a single leader line. 4. Drafting. You can create freestanding leader lines anywhere in the graphics window. Freestanding leader lines can be associated with the geometry selected during their creation or by entering points relative to an entity. etc. 3. 5.2. enter additional points to create a segmented leader line. Unless you turn off the display of leader lines in the Drafting Globals dialog box. Mastercam creates the witness line between them. Choose Main Menu. 2. Beginning with the arrowhead position. The Entity Selection menu displays.

Choose Edit text to turn on the edit text function (there should be a ‘Y’ following the option to show that it is turned on). Drafting. notes. 1. Note: For additional dialog box help. and tolerances. For additional help with individual parameter settings. ¨ Edit a single drafting entity (Quick Edit (G)lobals option). you can save the new drafting settings to a file before closing the Drafting Globals dialog box. display conditions.4. Click the ? in the upper-right corner. display. and labels without changing the entity’s position in the graphics window. 5. Choose Main Menu. To modify individual settings. Create. select the appropriate tab and set desired parameters. and arrowheads associated with dimensions. choose the Help button on each tab. notes. ¨ Set initial drafting parameters and save them to the Mastercam configuration file (Screen Configure option) Editing drafting text Turning on the Drafting menu’s Edit text function allows you to edit the text of drafting dimensions. and baseline increments. ¨ To keep settings for future use. ¨ Select the Settings tab to set miscellaneous drafting parameters affecting associativity. Notes: ¨ You cannot select or edit hatch entities. 175 . as follows (only tabs and parameters relevant to selected entities will be available): ¨ Select the Dimension Attributes tab to set parameters affecting dimension format. as described above. ¨ In addition to editing multiple drafting entities. and labels. then click a parameter. witness lines. ¨ text. ¨ Select the Leaders/Witness/Arrows tab to set parameters affecting the display and appearance of leader lines. 2. Note: Choosing Edit text again turns off the edit text function (Y changes to N). Choose OK to close the Drafting Globals dialog box and apply settings to selected entities. you can use the Drafting Globals dialog box to: ¨ Set current drafting parameters that apply to all new entities you may create during the drawing session (Drafting Globals option). regeneration. ¨ Select the Dimension Text tab to set parameters affecting the size and appearance of dimension Select the Note Text tab to set parameters affecting the size and appearance of note and label text.

For more information see Related Topics. Choose OK. Select one or more closed chains. The Hatch dialog box opens. or delete a user-defined cross-hatch pattern. 4. Notes: ¨ Mastercam creates one hatch entity. which form holes in the pattern. Type text changes in the appropriate text box. Note: You can also edit drafting text while dragging an entity by choosing the Quick Edit (T)ext option. 5. spacing. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to edit the text of additional drafting entities. edit. Select a drafting dimension. Mastercam fills each closed boundary with the hatch pattern with the exception of nested boundaries. regardless of the number of boundaries that you select. Choose Main Menu.3. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. In either dialog box. To change a hatch entity. Then create a new hatch entity. you can insert special characters (choose Add Symbol or Ø). Create. as follows: In the Spacing box. 1. 3. you can also load text from a file (choose Load File). If necessary. Note: In the Note dialog box. Defining a hatch pattern Choosing User defined hatch patterns in the Hatch dialog box opens the User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box. Note: If you want to define. and rotation angle for closed curve boundaries that you select. choose User defined hatch patterns. In the Angle box. first delete the existing hatch entity. ¨ ¨ 4. Select a hatch pattern from the Pattern list. type a different value for the angle of the hatch lines. or label to open the Edit Dimension Text dialog box (if a dimension is selected) or the Note dialog box (if a note or label is selected). using the above procedure. Creating hatch entities Choosing the Hatch option on the Drafting menu lets you create hatch entities by specifying a hatch pattern. where you can create up to eight user-defined hatch patterns (in addition to the eight standard hatch 176 . change the spacing and/or angle settings. ¨ You cannot edit a hatch entity in the graphics window. then choose Done. 5. Drafting. then choose OK to close the dialog box and apply changes to the selected entity. type a different value for spacing between hatch lines. Hatch. 2. note.

) 1. select the number of the user-defined pattern you wish to Note: The Hatch Number corresponds to the User Defined # in the Hatch dialog box. Choose User defined hatch patterns. The User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box opens and the first user-defined hatch number is selected. you can specify up to 16 hatch lines and 16 crosshatch lines. Specify new Hatch Lines and Cross Hatch Lines as follows: Choose New Line. ¨ ¨ 5. or Broken Line. Create. Create. Shortcut: In the Pattern list. Solid Line. 3. Hatch. The User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box opens with that pattern already selected as the Hatch Number. Note: The Hatch Number corresponds to the User Defined # in the Hatch dialog box. 2. The Hatch dialog box opens. You can then proceed to step 4. In the Hatch Number drop-down list. Choose New Hatch to select the next available number of a new pattern you wish to add. or Broken Line. The User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box opens and the first user-defined Hatch Number is selected. ¨ ¨ 5. 3. 4. (You cannot edit the standard hatch patterns supplied by Mastercam.patterns supplied by Mastercam). then choose either Blank Line. edit. 2. The Hatch dialog box opens. 177 . 4. 1. Choose Main Menu. Hatch. Repeat the previous step for each line you wish to add. Modify Hatch Lines and Cross Hatch Lines as follows: Select a number from the Line # list. Drafting. Editing a hatch pattern Choosing the Hatch option on the Drafting menu lets you edit the hatch and crosshatch lines of an existing user-defined hatch pattern. Choose OK to save your changes and close the User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box. Drafting. double-click the user-defined pattern you wish to edit. Choose Main Menu. Solid Line. Choose User defined hatch patterns. Choose OK to save your work and close the User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box. then choose either Blank Line. Repeat the previous step for each line you wish to modify. For each user-defined pattern.

Choose User defined hatch patterns. Drafting. Create. Hatch. select the number of the user-defined pattern you wish to delete. The Drafting Globals dialog box opens. 4. You can then proceed to step 4. To get settings from a file. Choose Delete Hatch to the remove the selected user-defined pattern. select the appropriate tab and set desired parameters. Globals. and tolerances. Choose Main Menu. Drafting. The User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box opens with that pattern already selected. 2. Create. select the Settings tab and choose one of the following options: ¨ ¨ ¨ 3. Setting global drafting parameters for the current drawing session Choosing the Globals option on the Drafting menu opens the Drafting Globals dialog box and lets you set drafting parameters and preferences that apply to all drafting entities you subsequently create during the current drawing session. Get globals from disk file Get globals from entity Get default globals To modify individual settings. Note: The Hatch Number corresponds to the User Defined # in the Hatch dialog box. as follows: ¨ Select the Dimension Attributes tab to set parameters affecting dimension format. Shortcut: In the Pattern list. 1. Select the Dimension Text tab to set parameters affecting the size and appearance of dimension 178 . The settings you enter override. double-click the user-defined pattern you wish to edit. 3. 5. The Hatch dialog box opens. Choose Main Menu. The deleted hatch number reverts to Undefined. The User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box opens and the first user-defined hatch number is selected. Choose OK to save the change and close the User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box.Deleting a hatch pattern Choosing the Hatch option on the Drafting menu lets you delete an existing user-defined hatch pattern. from an entity. initial drafting configuration settings loaded when you started Mastercam or initialized the current drawing session. In the Hatch Number drop-down list. or from the system defaults. for the remainder of the current drafting session. display. ¨ text. Setting these parameters before creating entities can save you time later on by minimizing the need to edit or recreate entities with the properties you want. 2. 1.

¨ Select the Note Text tab to set parameters affecting the size and appearance of note and label text. ¨ Select the Leaders/Witness/Arrows tab to set parameters affecting the display and appearance of leader lines. then click a parameter. Notes: ¨ To keep settings for future use. witness lines. ¨ Select the Settings tab to set miscellaneous drafting parameters affecting associativity. you can save the current drafting settings to a file before closing the Drafting Globals dialog box. Note: For additional help with individual parameter settings. and labels. as described above. and baseline increments. display conditions. and arrowheads associated with dimensions. regeneration. Edit a single drafting entity (Quick Edit (G)lobals option). notes. click the ? in the upper-right corner. Choose OK to close the Drafting Globals dialog box and use the new settings for creating drafting entities during the current drawing session. 4. ¨ Set initial drafting parameters and save them to the Mastercam configuration file (Screen Configure option) 179 . you can use the Drafting Globals dialog box to: ¨ ¨ Edit multiple drafting entities (Drafting Multi edit option). ¨ In addition to setting drafting parameters for the current drawing session.

and surface models. About solid modeling Solid modeling refers to the process of creating solids. like molding a piece of clay. you can perform subsequent operations to modify the solid. rather than building a model from a series of unrelated entities. revolving. sphere. You can then adapt these steps to create your own solid model. Unlike wireframe models. The first operation. For example. which define the closed boundary of the solid. Mastercam is able to keep track of the inside and outside of the model for you. which are a collection of surfaces. Mastercam creates one or more bricks (solids with no operation history) to represent the disjoint pieces. You can create a base operation by taking one of the following actions: ¨ ¨ ¨ Define a solid by extruding. Mastercam does not support creation of disjoint bodies. To access the Solids menu. A solid is a closed. Import a solid from a parasolid file. choose Solids from the Main Menu.Master cam Solids The Solids menu gives you options for performing solid operations to create and modify solid models and for managing solid operations. A solid is defined by one or more operations. It cannot be moved in or deleted from the operation list. you can create and machine a solid model in Mastercam. Creating a solid model in Mastercam Through a few easy steps. three-dimensional geometric entity that occupies a region of space and that consists of one or more faces. Note: For additional information on these functions. a solid model is a single entity. Step 1: Create a base operation. and even combine it with another solid—it still remains one entity. see Solids menu options and Reading a Parasolid file. then hollow it out. called the base operation. The system automatically performs these actions for you. always maintaining each solid as a single entity. Because a solid is a closed. sweeping. or torus. You never have to determine the surfaces that you want to keep or trim when you perform operations on the solid. You work with a solid model as a whole. you can add fillets to a solid. The steps outlined below give you an overview of the process of solid modeling in Mastercam. Step 2: Create additional operations. Define a solid using primitive (pre-defined) shapes. This characteristic makes solid modeling easy because the system handles the complexities of the model behind the scenes. cone. such as a cylinder. However. Common) operation would result in disjoint bodies. creates the solid. Once the base operation has been created. or lofting chains of curves. when a Trim or Boolean (Remove. which are a collection of curves. See the related topics for more information. regardless of its complexity. A base operation is always listed as the first operation under the solid in the Solids Manager. block. organized model. You can create multiple solids in a file. You can perform the following functions to modify a solid: ¨ ¨ Remove material by making one or more cuts on a target solid Add material by creating one or more bosses on a target solid 180 .

Mastercam associates it with the solid that it creates or modifies. To fillet edges on a different solid. You can correct dirty operations by regenerating them. Associativity eliminates the need to recreate a solid each time you modify it. You can use Mastercam Mill and Mastercam Lathe to create toolpaths directly on solid geometry. ¨ Dirty: Describes an operation whose defining parameters and/or geometry have changed and no longer match the associated solid. see Solids menu options. check a solid model at various points in its development. see Managing solid operations. see Mill toolpaths and Lathe toolpaths. you would need to create a new fillet operation on that solid. Step 3: Manage solid operations. its operations should be clean. After editing an operation’s components (geometry and parameters). you can regenerate the solid to incorporate your changes. When you perform a solid operation such as extrude. you cannot copy operations or move them to a different solid. Note: For additional information on the Solids Manager. when rechaining a fillet operation. The following terms describe a solid operation and the current state of its associativity: ¨ Clean: Describes an operation whose defining parameters and geometry match the associated solid. draft face. find common solid volumes. remove solids from one another. etc. For a solid to be stable and current. The Solids Manager lists the operations that were performed to define each solid in the current file. You can check the location of an operation in the model. ¨ ¨ Draft solid faces Trim solids to a plane or surface Note: For additional information on these functions. For example. ¨ Invalid: Describes an operation that fails due to a problem in its geometry and/or parameters. This condition applies to all newly created operations and to operations that have been successfully regenerated. Mastercam marks each dirty operation and its associated solid with a red X in the Solids Manager. This association can be broken only by deleting the operation. Solid associativity Solid associativity is the dependent relationship between a solid and the operations that define it. all of the new edges that you select must be on the same solid where the operation was originally defined. and regenerate all or individual solids. which prevents it from being regenerated. fillet. Because an operation is associated with the solid that it creates or modifies.. Mastercam marks each invalid operation and its associated solid with a red question 181 .¨ ¨ ¨ Smooth solid edges by adding a radius (fillet) Bevel (chamfer) solid edges Hollow out (shell) solids and optionally cut entry holes ¨ Perform Boolean functions: add solids together. Step 4: Machine the solid. Deleting geometry that defines an operation is a common cause of invalid operations. edit an operation’s components (geometry and parameters). For more information.

The system extrudes chains of curves by driving the shape of the curves along a linear path using a specified direction. and other parameters that further define the results. The number of resulting solids. and what construction method you use. Mastercam associates the tool body with the target body. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on each selected chain of curves to reflect its current extrusion direction. ¨ ¨ ¨ Indicate the type of extrude operation to perform: To create new solid bodies. Set the extrusion direction. 4. choose Create Body. distance. 1. clear Combine Operations. The system performs the extrude operation or prompts you to: ¨ Enter a point if you chose to extend the extruded chains to a point.mark (?) in the Solids Manager. To add material to an existing body. Solids. 6. select Combine Operations. cuts on an existing body. When you perform a Boolean operation. If you delete the cut operation. Associativity does not exist between individual solids in a Mastercam file unless those solids are used in Boolean combinations. 2. indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation. choose Cut Body. whether the chains are nested. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 4). a defining operation always precedes a dependent operation in the operation list. 182 . In the Solids Manager. Set additional parameters as needed. then choose OK. if a cut operation results in a new face and you fillet that face. Note: Each chain that you select must be planar (flat). Note: The default extrusion direction is normal (perpendicular) to the curves. For example. but all chains do not have to be in the same plane. or bosses on an existing body. Associativity can also exist between some solid operations. whether you combine operations. 5. To remove material from an existing body. Creating/modifying solids by extruding chains of curves The Extrude function lets you extrude planar chains of curves to create one or more new solid bodies. choose Add Boss. Select one or more chains. To process each chain selection as a separate operation. cuts. Choose Main Menu. then choose Done. Mastercam deletes the fillet operation as well because the edge that defined the fillet operation no longer exists. 3. Extrude. then regenerating the operation. or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select. You can try to correct an invalid operation by making changes to the operation’s parameters and/or geometry. the fillet operation is dependent on the cut operation.

The Extrusion Direction menu. Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. This function tells Mastercam to extrude all selected chains in the same plane. The default extrusion direction is normal to each chain of curves that you select to extrude. you must use the normal direction. However. The endpoint closest to where you select the line functions as the endpoint of the 183 . or boss. ¨ Select a face if you chose to trim a cut or boss operation to a selected face. Mastercam does not support extrude operations that would result in disjoint bodies. The sense of the normal vector is determined by the chaining direction and the righthand rule. It is set so that the chain is counter-clockwise about the normal vector. Normal : Sets the extrusion direction normal to each selected chain of curves based on the chaining direction and the right-hand rule. Note: When using the thin-wall construction method. ¨ Select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. which displays after you select the chains of curves to extrude. Normal One : Sets the extrusion direction of all selected chains normal to one chain that you select. cut. Setting the extrusion direction The extrusion direction is the direction that the system drives the shape of the selected chains of curves to form an extruded solid. Line : Sets the extrusion direction of all selected chains based on the direction of a line that you select in the graphics window. although you can reverse the sense of the normal vector. a direction arrow also displays on each selected chain of curves to show the current extrusion direction. When this menu displays.¨ Indicate the outward direction for open chains of curves if you chose the thin-wall construction method. ConstZ : Sets the extrusion direction according to the positive Z axis of the current construction plane. You can also access this menu from the Extrude Chain dialog box if you need to edit the extrusion direction at a later time. gives you options for changing the extrusion direction.

Reverse One : Reverses the current extrusion direction of one chain that you select. cuts on an existing body. Select a line in the graphics window to use as the rotation axis. 5. whether the chains are nested. Reverse It : Reverses the current extrusion direction of all selected chains. Note: The extrusion direction cannot be parallel to the plane defined by the selected chains of curves because you cannot extrude a chain sideways. The points are not associative. then choose Done to set the axis. Revolve. choose Add Boss. and the extrusion direction moves away from this point toward the second point that you enter. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 5). the solid does not update if the points that you enter are actual point entities and they change. 2. ¨ ¨ ¨ Change the rotation axis and/or direction as needed.direction vector. cuts. the solid does not update if the line changes. To create new solid bodies. choose Create Body. A direction arrow displays on the selected line. and what construction method you use. indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation. Two Points : Sets the extrusion direction of all selected chains based on the direction of the axis defined by two points that you enter using the Point Entry menu. Done : Accepts the draft direction indicated by the direction arrow on the reference geometry. and the extrusion direction moves away from this point along the line. therefore. Choose Main Menu. The line is not associative. Indicate the type of revolve operation to perform: To add material to an existing body. or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select. 184 . The first point that you enter functions as the endpoint of the direction vector. 3. The system revolves chains of curves by driving the shape of the curves about an axis using given start and end angles and other parameters that further define the results. Note: The set of chains that you select must be planar (flat). select Combine Operations. 4. The number of resulting solids. Solids. whether you combine operations. Creating/modifying solids by revolving chains of curves The Revolve function lets you revolve planar chains of curves to create one or more new solid bodies. or bosses on an existing body. therefore. 6. choose Cut Body. Select one or more chains. To remove material from an existing body. then choose Done. and the Revolve menu displays. 1.

However. including a line on the selected chain of curves. The start and end angles are then measured in a positive sense about the axis. 7. or bosses on an existing body. Selecting a rotation axis The rotation axis is the line about which the system revolves the chains of curves to form a revolved solid. The axis line is associative. When this menu displays. Note: The rotation direction follows the right-hand rule . a direction arrow also displays on the selected line to show the current rotation direction. Note: The revolve operation fails if the axis line causes the solid to self-intersect. you must regenerate the solid to update the association between the line and the solid if the line changes. with the axis’ direction vector representing the positive Z axis. planar chains of curves. Axis : Returns you to the graphics window where you can select a new line to use as the rotation axis. which sets the rotation direction. The system performs the revolve operation or prompts you to: ¨ Indicate the outward direction for open chains of curves if you chose the thin-wall construction method. cuts on an existing body. Reverse : Reverses the current rotation direction. then choose OK. Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. clear Combine Operations. gives you options for selecting a different line and for reversing the rotation direction. to create one or more new solid bodies. therefore. Mastercam does not support revolve operations that would result in disjoint bodies.¨ To process each chain selection as a separate operation. You can also access this menu from the Revolve Chain dialog box if you need to edit the rotation axis at a later time. You can select any line in the graphics window to use as the rotation axis. Done : Accepts the current rotation axis and direction. The default rotation direction is determined when you select a line to use as the rotation axis. ¨ Select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. The endpoint closest to the cursor’s position when you select the line defines the base point of the axis’ direction vector. called section chains. Set additional parameters as needed. The system sweeps chains 185 . Creating/modifying solids by sweeping chains of curves The Sweep function lets you sweep closed. The Revolve menu. which displays after you select a line to use as the rotation axis.

4. and whether you combine operations. 5. choose Add Boss. 1. However. The number of resulting solids. Choose OK. Sweep. The angle between the section chains and the path chain is maintained throughout each resulting swept solid. Select one or more closed chains of curves to sweep. select a Sync option from the Chain Synchronization Options dialog box. Choose Main Menu. Indicate the type of blend method to use: 186 . To remove material from an existing body. (optional) Choose Sync. 1. Loft. clear Combine Operations. Solids. Choose Main Menu. Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. whether the chains are nested. cuts. 2. Select two or more closed chains of curves. Solids. 4. then choose Done. Indicate the type of sweep operation to perform: To create new solid bodies. To process each chain selection as a separate operation. 3. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 4). The start point of each chain and the Sync method that you use when selecting the chains affect how the system aligns the selected chains as it transitions between them. then choose Done. a cut on an existing body. select Combine Operations. or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select. 6. indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation.of curves by translating and rotating the shape of the curves along the entire distance of a single chain of curves. ¨ ¨ ¨ Select one curve or chain of curves for the sweep path. The system performs the sweep operation or prompts you to select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. choose Create Body. then choose Done. To add material to an existing body. choose Cut Body. The system performs a loft operation by transitioning between two or more chains of curves in the order that you select them using either smooth or ruled (linear) blending between the chains and by capping the first and last chains with solid faces. 2. Note: The set of chains that you select must be planar (flat). Creating/modifying solids by lofting chains of curves The Loft function lets you loft closed chains of curves to create a new solid body. 3. called the path chain. Mastercam does not support sweep operations that would result in disjoint bodies. or a boss on an existing body.

6. ¨ Create the lofted solid in multiple operations using four or five adjacent chains at a time. You cannot select a chain of curves more than once for a given loft operation. choose Add Boss. clear Create as Ruled Indicate the type of loft operation to perform: To create new solid bodies. which takes less time to calculate. you reduce the time it takes for the system to calculate the solid. ¨ Create the lofted solid as a ruled solid. however. Notes: ¨ You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. especially when the lofted solid is defined by many chains or if some or all of the chains contain splines. the selected chains of curves must meet the following criteria: Each individual chain of curves must be planar. ¨ Use a sync method when selecting the chains. however. A selected chain of curves cannot self-intersect. By indicating how the chains should be aligned. check Create as Ruled To create a linear blend. choose Cut Body. All of the chains that you select must follow the same chaining direction. Time-saving tips for creating lofted solids Lofted solids sometimes require a large amount of processing time. ¨ ¨ ¨ To create a smooth blend. 187 . To remove material from an existing body. by selecting the Create as Ruled parameter on the Loft Chain dialog box . the set of chains that you select does not have to be planar. The system performs the loft operation or prompts you to select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. Each chain of curves must form a closed boundary. then create each additional lofted solid as a boss on the first body. You can increase the calculation speed for lofted solids by trying one or more of the following actions: ¨ Limit the number of chains to four or five and select the chains that provide the most accurate overall definition for the solid. Choose OK to close the dialog box. ¨ For a Loft operation to succeed. Mastercam does not support loft operations that would result in disjoint bodies.¨ ¨ 5. Create the first lofted solid as a separate body. To add material to an existing body. choose Create Body.

regardless of whether the chains are nested. or Sweep Chain dialog box. You can then thicken sheet entities to create closed solid bodies. ¨ When you extrude or revolve open chains of curves using the thin-wall construction method. then thickens the sheet entities to form solids. if you extrude a square into a solid using the regular construction method. While this interim body is not an entity type that you can create or manipulate on your own. The following differences further distinguish the construction methods: ¨ You can use open or closed chains of curves when creating solids with the thin-wall construction method. which has eight vertical walls (four interior and four exterior). For example. the system extrudes or revolves each entity in the chain to form sheet entities (similar to surfaces). combine operations when modifying the geometry of existing Extrude. With the thin-wall construction method. or Sweep Cut/Boss operations by adding new chains. With the regular method. 188 . you have the option to draft the faces associated with the endpoints of open chains of curves when you apply a draft angle to the solid’s walls. revolving. Revolve Chain. which is normal to the first selected chain of curves. even if Combine Operations was not selected during initial creation. you can tell Mastercam to combine operations on multiple chains into a single operation instead of creating a separate operation for each chain. cube-shaped solid. ¨ When extruding curves using the thin-wall construction method. You can. however. You cannot combine operations when creating a new solid body or modifying parameters from the Solids Manager. You can combine operations only when creating new cuts or bosses on an existing body. Note: Mastercam calculates sheet entities when creating solids. however. cut. or boss. With the regular construction method. If. the result is a cube-shaped solid. or sweeping chains of curves. or boss. ¨ With the regular construction method. each non-nested chain of curves or each set of nested chains results in a separate solid. You can use only closed chains with the regular construction method. Combining solid operations When you create a new cut or boss operation by extruding. With the thin-wall construction method. then extrudes or revolves the sheet entity into a solid. you extrude a square using the thin-wall construction method. Revolve. The most significant difference between the construction methods is how Mastercam calculates the solid. cut. regular method of constructing solids When you use the Extrude or Revolve functions to generate solids from chains of curves. you can set the direction using any option on the Extrusion Direction menu. the result is a hollowed-out. each chain of curves results in a separate solid. which has four vertical walls. You choose this option by selecting Combine Operations in the Extrude Chain. you must select the outward direction (to distinguish it from the inward direction) at the end of the operation so that the system knows how to apply the inward and outward thickening values. you have the option to create the solids using the regular or the thin-wall construction method. which must be closed. Mastercam does let you create sheet entities by stitching surfaces or by removing faces from a solid. you must use the default extrusion direction. the system creates a sheet entity (similar to a trimmed surface) within the boundary of the curves. ¨ When extruding open chains of curves using the thin-wall construction method.Thin-wall vs.

Choose Main Menu. Next menu. Solids. Solids. Primitives. a closed solid body is created. Notes: ¨ If Mastercam cannot create a closed solid body. Mastercam aggregates operations on selected chains (for holes) or edges (for fillets) into a single operation. Choose No to create the open sheet body without edge-curve geometry. Combining operations makes it easier to modify similar or repetitive operations involving multiple chains. then choose OK to complete the operation. ¨ You can change an open sheet body into a closed solid body by thickening it. Primitives. 1. Mastercam displays the Primitives menu when you choose Main Menu. Creating solids in pre-defined (primitive) shapes The Primitives menu gives you options for creating primitive solids. ¨ If you cleared Use all visible surfaces. This function is useful for working on imported files containing surface representations of a solid or for converting newly constructed surfaces that may have been created to replace problem surfaces. Next menu. they are solids that are created in simple. Cylinder. Instead. and edge gaps between surfaces are within a specified tolerance. ¨ If you selected Use all visible surfaces. Otherwise. Mastercam creates a cylinder-shaped solid in the graphics window. Mastercam immediately converts all visible surfaces into one or more solids. Choose Main Menu. an open sheet body is created. 2. the Select surfaces menu displays. Select one or more surfaces in the graphics window. Set parameters on the dialog box as needed. Stitching surfaces into solids The From Surfaces function lets you create one or more solids from selected surfaces by "stitching" them together. If you select all surfaces. then choose Done to convert the selected surfaces into one or more solids. predefined shapes. These solids are not defined by curve geometry.You can also tell Mastercam to combine appropriate operations when you create operations as part of finding features on a brick solid. 189 . From surfaces. Next menu. ¨ You can set default parameter values for the Stitch Surfaces into Solid(s) dialog box by choosing Solids Settings. The Stitch Surfaces into Solid(s) dialog box opens. Solids. Creating a cylinder-shaped primitive solid 1. In this case. a message asks. Stitching from the CAD Settings tab of the System Configuration dialog box. since you only have to edit parameters once from the Solids Manager. Stitching surfaces can result in the same kind of sheet solid as removing one or more faces from a closed solid body. "Create edge curves on open edges?" Choose Yes to select a color for the edge curves and create an open sheet body with edge-curve geometry.

Notes: ¨ If you create multiple primitive solids of a given type. Choose Done to exit the Cone menu. then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area.2. ¨ To set the position of the cylinder. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. ¨ To set the position of the cone. Btm radius. Mastercam creates each new solid using the exact parameters as the previously created solid of the same type. Mastercam names it "Cone" by default. After choosing any of these options. After choosing either option. choose Axis. 2. then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area. you must enter a value in the prompt area. you must enter a value in the prompt area. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam names it "Cylinder" by default. and Taper angle. choose Height. If you choose not to name the operation. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. Primitives. Modify the solid by setting parameters on the Cone menu as follows: Choose Done to exit the Cylinder menu. Modify the solid by setting parameters on the Cylinder menu as follows: ¨ To set the size of the cylinder. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the cylinder’s bottom face. Notes: ¨ If you create multiple primitive solids of a given type. Note: This step is optional. Choose Name. Solids. Top radius. 3. Mastercam creates each new solid using the exact parameters as the previously created solid of the same type. ¨ To set the size of the cone. choose Base point. choose Axis. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the cone’s bottom face. Cone. 4. Creating a cone-shaped primitive solid 1. Note: This step is optional. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them. choose Height and Radius. 190 . Next menu. Choose Name. Mastercam creates a cone-shaped solid in the graphics window. choose Base point. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. ¨ To set the orientation of the cylinder. ¨ To set the orientation of the cone. If you choose not to name the operation. 4. 3.

If you choose not to name the operation. Choose Done to exit the Block menu. After choosing any of these options. 4. ¨ To set the block’s position and 2D size in one step. choose Base point. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. choose Radius. Block. width. Choose Name. Mastercam creates a sphere-shaped solid in the graphics window. Creating a sphere-shaped primitive solid 1. 191 . then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area. Choose Main Menu. Notes: ¨ If you create multiple primitive solids of a given type. ¨ To set the position of the block. You can also choose Rotate to revolve the block about its base point by an angle value that you enter in the prompt area. Note: This step is optional. Mastercam names it "Block" by default. choose Axis (H) and Axis (L). and Width. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axes that correspond to the block’s height and length. Primitives. 2. then enter a value in the prompt area. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. If you choose not to name the operation. Primitives. ¨ To set the orientation of the block. choose Corners. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the block’s bottom face. Solids. Length. you must enter a value in the prompt area. Enter two points in the graphics window for opposing corners of the block’s bottom face. Solids. then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area. The block’s height is unchanged. Modify the solid by setting parameters on the Block menu as follows: ¨ To set the size of the block. Sphere. Next menu. Note: This step is optional. 3. 3. ¨ Modify the solid by setting parameters on the Sphere menu as follows: To set the size of the sphere. Choose Main Menu. Choose Name. choose Base point. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the sphere. Mastercam updates the length. choose Height. Next menu. Mastercam names it "Sphere" by default. Mastercam creates a block-shaped solid in the graphics window.Creating a block-shaped primitive solid 1. Mastercam creates each new solid using the exact parameters as the previously created solid of the same type. 2. ¨ To set the position of the block. and base point. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them.

4. then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area. choose Base point. Notes: ¨ If you create multiple primitive solids of a given type. Next menu. then choose Done. Next menu. ¨ If you create multiple primitive solids of a given type. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center of the torus’ hole. Mastercam creates a torus-shaped solid in the graphics window. Note: This step is optional. Solids. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. 4. If you choose not to name the operation. Choose Name. resulting in an open sheet body. Notes: Choose Done to exit the Sphere menu. 3. Remove faces. After choosing either of these options. The Remove Faces From a Solid dialog box opens. Select the faces to remove. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. 1. Choose Done to exit the Torus menu. choose Maj radius and Min radius. 2. Mastercam names it "Torus" by default. Torus. You can remove faces from either a closed solid body or a sheet entity. 192 . Removing one or more faces from a solid can result in the same kind of sheet solid as Stitching from surfaces whose edge gaps are too large to create a closed solid body. Primitives. Solids. Mastercam creates each new solid using the exact parameters as the previously created solid of the same type. ¨ To set the position of the torus. 2. Choose Main Menu. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them. Creating a torus-shaped primitive solid 1. They are exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them. you must enter a value in the prompt area. choose Axis. Mastercam creates each new solid using the exact parameters as the previously created solid of the same type. Modify the solid by setting parameters on the Torus menu as follows: ¨ To set the size of the torus. Modifying Solids Removing faces from a solid The Remove Faces function lets you remove selected faces from a solid. You may use this function to remove faces that have problems identified by the Check Solid function or to remove faces so that new surfaces can be constructed and then stitched using the From Surfaces function. ¨ To set the orientation of the torus. Choose Main Menu.

3. Indicate whether to keep. 1. Mastercam selects it automatically. 3. 2. 1. or bosses on an existing body. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window and it is a sheet solid. In the Name text box. and the Sheet thickening direction menu displays. 4. 5. indicating which side will be thickened. or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select. distance. blank. then choose OK to complete the operation. Choose Main Menu. "Thicken"). cuts. cuts on an existing body. To thicken both sides. Next menu. Set the extrusion direction. Thickening a sheet solid The Thicken function lets you thicken an open sheet solid and thereby convert it into a closed solid body. 193 . enter a name that will identify this operation in history (or use the default entry. 3. choose One side. To reverse the thickening direction. whether you combine operations. Choose OK to complete the operation. Indicate which side of the solid to thicken: ¨ One Side. Solids. and this step is unnecessary. and what construction method you use. Creating cuts on a solids Creating/modifying solids by extruding chains of curves The Extrude function lets you extrude planar chains of curves to create one or more new solid bodies. accept or change the value in the Thickness text box. Choose OK to complete the operation. Select a sheet solid in the graphics window. choose Both sides. To specify a thickness. or delete the original solid and what level the resulting solid will be placed on. Solids. The system extrudes chains of curves by driving the shape of the curves along a linear path using a specified direction. Extrude. choose Flip. Choose Main Menu. whether the chains are nested. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on each selected chain of curves to reflect its current extrusion direction. The number of resulting solids. You can use this function in conjunction with the From Surfaces function to turn selected surfaces into a solid that can be managed like any other solid created in Mastercam. Note: Each chain that you select must be planar (flat). A direction arrow displays on the selected solid. 4. The Thicken sheet solid dialog box opens. Select one or more chains. and other parameters that further define the results. then choose Done. Thicken. but all chains do not have to be in the same plane. To thicken one side only. ¨ Both Sides. then choose OK. 2.

To process each chain selection as a separate operation. To add material to an existing body. then choose OK. 194 . ¨ Select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 4). then choose Done. clear Combine Operations. Note: The set of chains that you select must be planar (flat). Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. 1. Select one or more chains. The system performs the extrude operation or prompts you to: ¨ Enter a point if you chose to extend the extruded chains to a point. whether you combine operations. Revolve. choose Cut Body. cuts. Choose Main Menu. cuts on an existing body. A direction arrow displays on the selected line. select Combine Operations. Select a line in the graphics window to use as the rotation axis.Note: The default extrusion direction is normal (perpendicular) to the curves. or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select. 2. choose Create Body. 6. indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation. ¨ Indicate the outward direction for open chains of curves if you chose the thin-wall construction method. The system revolves chains of curves by driving the shape of the curves about an axis using given start and end angles and other parameters that further define the results. choose Add Boss. or bosses on an existing body. 5. However. To remove material from an existing body. and the Revolve menu displays. ¨ ¨ ¨ Indicate the type of extrude operation to perform: To create new solid bodies. Mastercam does not support extrude operations that would result in disjoint bodies. Solids. Creating/modifying solids by revolving chains of curves The Revolve function lets you revolve planar chains of curves to create one or more new solid bodies. ¨ Select a face if you chose to trim a cut or boss operation to a selected face. and what construction method you use. whether the chains are nested. The number of resulting solids. 3. Set additional parameters as needed. 4.

whether the chains are nested. choose Create Body. indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation. to create one or more new solid bodies. To remove material from an existing body. Solids. planar chains of curves. The system performs the revolve operation or prompts you to: ¨ Indicate the outward direction for open chains of curves if you chose the thin-wall construction method. 4. choose Create Body. 2. 1. ¨ ¨ ¨ Change the rotation axis and/or direction as needed.4. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 5). 195 . choose Cut Body. 5. cuts on an existing body. The system sweeps chains of curves by translating and rotating the shape of the curves along the entire distance of a single chain of curves. Indicate the type of sweep operation to perform: To create new solid bodies. ¨ Select one curve or chain of curves for the sweep path. then choose Done. 6. Choose Main Menu. 7. and whether you combine operations. or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select. cuts. The angle between the section chains and the path chain is maintained throughout each resulting swept solid. select Combine Operations. ¨ Select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. called section chains. Sweep. 3. Indicate the type of revolve operation to perform: To add material to an existing body. Creating/modifying solids by sweeping chains of curves The Sweep function lets you sweep closed. The number of resulting solids. choose Add Boss. Mastercam does not support revolve operations that would result in disjoint bodies. Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. then choose Done to set the axis. Set additional parameters as needed. However. Note: The set of chains that you select must be planar (flat). called the path chain. then choose OK. clear Combine Operations. Select one or more closed chains of curves to sweep. To create new solid bodies. or bosses on an existing body. To process each chain selection as a separate operation. then choose Done.

choose Add Boss. 2. To process each chain selection as a separate operation. select a Sync option from the Chain Synchronization Options dialog box. then choose Done. Choose OK to close the dialog box. To add material to an existing body. Loft. select Combine Operations. 196 . To remove material from an existing body. Indicate the type of blend method to use: To create a smooth blend. To add material to an existing body. choose Add Boss. a cut on an existing body. choose Create Body. indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation. Creating/modifying solids by lofting chains of curves The Loft function lets you loft closed chains of curves to create a new solid body. Choose Main Menu. Solids. check Create as Ruled To create a linear blend. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 4). Choose OK. Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. The system performs the sweep operation or prompts you to select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. Mastercam does not support sweep operations that would result in disjoint bodies. 6. clear Combine Operations. However. 1.¨ ¨ To remove material from an existing body. 6. clear Create as Ruled Indicate the type of loft operation to perform: To create new solid bodies. The system performs the loft operation or prompts you to select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. The start point of each chain and the Sync method that you use when selecting the chains affect how the system aligns the selected chains as it transitions between them. 3. ¨ ¨ ¨ Select two or more closed chains of curves. ¨ ¨ 5. 4. 5. choose Cut Body. The system performs a loft operation by transitioning between two or more chains of curves in the order that you select them using either smooth or ruled (linear) blending between the chains and by capping the first and last chains with solid faces. or a boss on an existing body. choose Cut Body. (optional) Choose Sync.

regardless of whether the chains are nested. you can set the direction using any option on the Extrusion Direction menu. you have the option to create the solids using the regular or the thin-wall construction method. For example. You can use only closed chains with the regular construction method. which has four vertical walls. You can then thicken sheet entities to create closed solid bodies. each non-nested chain of curves or each set of nested chains results in a separate solid. Thin-wall vs. You cannot select a chain of curves more than once for a given loft operation. you extrude a square using the thin-wall construction method. ¨ With the regular construction method. the selected chains of curves must meet the following criteria: Each individual chain of curves must be planar. then extrudes or revolves the sheet entity into a solid. the result is a hollowed-out. which is normal to the first selected chain of curves. With the thin-wall construction method. While this interim body is not an entity type that you can create or manipulate on your own. which has eight vertical walls (four interior and four exterior). If. or boss. The most significant difference between the construction methods is how Mastercam calculates the solid. cut. ¨ When you extrude or revolve open chains of curves using the thin-wall construction method. Mastercam does not support loft operations that would result in disjoint bodies. Mastercam does let you create sheet entities by stitching surfaces or by removing faces from a solid. ¨ When extruding curves using the thin-wall construction method. however. regular method of constructing solids When you use the Extrude or Revolve functions to generate solids from chains of curves. which must be closed. All of the chains that you select must follow the same chaining direction.Notes: ¨ You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. cube-shaped solid. you must use the default extrusion direction. Note: Mastercam calculates sheet entities when creating solids. A selected chain of curves cannot self-intersect. however. With the regular method. cut. the set of chains that you select does not have to be planar. the system creates a sheet entity (similar to a trimmed surface) within the boundary of the curves. the result is a cube-shaped solid. or boss. With the thin-wall construction method. each chain of curves results in a separate solid. you must select the outward direction (to distinguish it from the inward direction) at the end of the operation so that the system knows how to apply the inward and outward thickening values. 197 . ¨ For a Loft operation to succeed. then thickens the sheet entities to form solids. however. Each chain of curves must form a closed boundary. With the regular construction method. The following differences further distinguish the construction methods: ¨ You can use open or closed chains of curves when creating solids with the thin-wall construction method. if you extrude a square into a solid using the regular construction method. the system extrudes or revolves each entity in the chain to form sheet entities (similar to surfaces).

Solids. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 4). or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select. Note: Each chain that you select must be planar (flat). The system extrudes chains of curves by driving the shape of the curves along a linear path using a specified direction. 5. To process each chain selection as a separate operation. The number of resulting solids. To remove material from an existing body. ¨ Select a face if you chose to trim a cut or boss operation to a selected face. then choose OK. Set the extrusion direction. indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation. cuts. choose Cut Body. distance. 6. and what construction method you use. Creating/modifying solids by extruding chains of curves The Extrude function lets you extrude planar chains of curves to create one or more new solid bodies. The system performs the extrude operation or prompts you to: ¨ Enter a point if you chose to extend the extruded chains to a point. select Combine Operations. Note: The default extrusion direction is normal (perpendicular) to the curves. whether you combine operations. and other parameters that further define the results. 198 . ¨ ¨ ¨ Indicate the type of extrude operation to perform: To create new solid bodies. ¨ Select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. but all chains do not have to be in the same plane. Extrude. choose Create Body. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on each selected chain of curves to reflect its current extrusion direction. Choose Main Menu. clear Combine Operations. 4. whether the chains are nested. 3.¨ When extruding open chains of curves using the thin-wall construction method. cuts on an existing body. choose Add Boss. Select one or more chains. ¨ Indicate the outward direction for open chains of curves if you chose the thin-wall construction method. or bosses on an existing body. 2. then choose Done. 1. you have the option to draft the faces associated with the endpoints of open chains of curves when you apply a draft angle to the solid’s walls. Set additional parameters as needed. To add material to an existing body.

Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. To remove material from an existing body. Select one or more chains. 1.Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select. Note: The set of chains that you select must be planar (flat). Select a line in the graphics window to use as the rotation axis. A direction arrow displays on the selected line. and the Revolve menu displays. 5. 199 . Choose Main Menu. Creating/modifying solids by revolving chains of curves The Revolve function lets you revolve planar chains of curves to create one or more new solid bodies. The number of resulting solids. The system performs the revolve operation or prompts you to: ¨ Indicate the outward direction for open chains of curves if you chose the thin-wall construction method. choose Create Body. Mastercam does not support extrude operations that would result in disjoint bodies. select Combine Operations. clear Combine Operations. To process each chain selection as a separate operation. 7. Indicate the type of revolve operation to perform: To add material to an existing body. Mastercam does not support revolve operations that would result in disjoint bodies. cuts. Solids. 3. ¨ ¨ ¨ Change the rotation axis and/or direction as needed. then choose OK. then choose Done. However. cuts on an existing body. However. whether you combine operations. choose Add Boss. Revolve. To create new solid bodies. The system revolves chains of curves by driving the shape of the curves about an axis using given start and end angles and other parameters that further define the results. 4. Set additional parameters as needed. and what construction method you use. 2. ¨ Select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 5). or bosses on an existing body. indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation. choose Cut Body. whether the chains are nested. then choose Done to set the axis. 6.

200 . 5. whether the chains are nested. then choose Done. To remove material from an existing body. Choose OK. or bosses on an existing body. select a Sync option from the Chain Synchronization Options dialog box. called section chains. 3. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 4). To add material to an existing body. The system sweeps chains of curves by translating and rotating the shape of the curves along the entire distance of a single chain of curves. Indicate the type of sweep operation to perform: To create new solid bodies. or a boss on an existing body. and whether you combine operations.Creating/modifying solids by sweeping chains of curves The Sweep function lets you sweep closed. The start point of each chain and the Sync method that you use when selecting the chains affect how the system aligns the selected chains as it transitions between them. Note: The set of chains that you select must be planar (flat). ¨ ¨ ¨ Select one curve or chain of curves for the sweep path. The angle between the section chains and the path chain is maintained throughout each resulting swept solid. 4. Solids. Creating/modifying solids by lofting chains of curves The Loft function lets you loft closed chains of curves to create a new solid body. select Combine Operations. Mastercam does not support sweep operations that would result in disjoint bodies. 2. a cut on an existing body. 1. planar chains of curves. indicate whether or not to combine operations: ¨ ¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation. choose Cut Body. to create one or more new solid bodies. cuts. then choose Done. then choose Done. clear Combine Operations. choose Create Body. Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. Choose Main Menu. (optional) Choose Sync. Sweep. 2. or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select. cuts on an existing body. To process each chain selection as a separate operation. The number of resulting solids. 6. Loft. called the path chain. choose Add Boss. Solids. Choose Main Menu. Select one or more closed chains of curves to sweep. 1. The system performs the sweep operation or prompts you to select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. The system performs a loft operation by transitioning between two or more chains of curves in the order that you select them using either smooth or ruled (linear) blending between the chains and by capping the first and last chains with solid faces. However.

If. A selected chain of curves cannot self-intersect.3. the selected chains of curves must meet the following criteria: Each individual chain of curves must be planar. To add material to an existing body. 201 . ¨ For a Loft operation to succeed. clear Create as Ruled Indicate the type of loft operation to perform: To create new solid bodies. With the regular method. the result is a cube-shaped solid. To remove material from an existing body. You cannot select a chain of curves more than once for a given loft operation. All of the chains that you select must follow the same chaining direction. then thickens the sheet entities to form solids. 6. if you extrude a square into a solid using the regular construction method. Indicate the type of blend method to use: To create a smooth blend. Thin-wall vs. however. you have the option to create the solids using the regular or the thin-wall construction method. For example. which must be closed. With the thin-wall construction method. check Create as Ruled To create a linear blend. choose Create Body. choose Add Boss. Notes: ¨ You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. then extrudes or revolves the sheet entity into a solid. The system performs the loft operation or prompts you to select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file. which has four vertical walls. Choose OK to close the dialog box. however. you extrude a square using the thin-wall construction method. however. the result is a hollowed-out. Each chain of curves must form a closed boundary. Mastercam does not support loft operations that would result in disjoint bodies. the system creates a sheet entity (similar to a trimmed surface) within the boundary of the curves. The most significant difference between the construction methods is how Mastercam calculates the solid. which has eight vertical walls (four interior and four exterior). regular method of constructing solids When you use the Extrude or Revolve functions to generate solids from chains of curves. the set of chains that you select does not have to be planar. cube-shaped solid. 4. ¨ ¨ 5. choose Cut Body. ¨ ¨ ¨ Select two or more closed chains of curves. the system extrudes or revolves each entity in the chain to form sheet entities (similar to surfaces).

then choose OK to chamfer the edges. Chamfering solid edges When you choose Chamfer from the Solids menu. You can use only closed chains with the regular construction method. 2. While this interim body is not an entity type that you can create or manipulate on your own. The system chamfers solid edges by introducing new faces that add material to or remove material from the selected edges and that are not tangent with the adjoining faces of the original edge. which determines where the chamfer is positioned along both edge faces. With the regular construction method. the entire face or body remains chamfered. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. Chamfering a solid using one distance This function defines a chamfer using one distance. or boss. the Chamfer menu displays to give you options for creating chamfers. cut. you can set the direction using any option on the Extrusion Direction menu. 1 Distance. 1. regardless of whether the chains are nested. each non-nested chain of curves or each set of nested chains results in a separate solid. or boss. You determine the extent of the chamfer by specifying distances and possibly an angle to offset the chamfer from the selected edge on the adjoining faces. A chamfer is a type of edge blending that has a linear crosssection. Click on the topics below for more information. ¨ When extruding curves using the thin-wall construction method. or beveled edges. you have the option to draft the faces associated with the endpoints of open chains of curves when you apply a draft angle to the solid’s walls. Set parameters on the dialog box as needed. Select the edges. each chain of curves results in a separate solid. The Chamfer Parameters dialog box opens.Note: Mastercam calculates sheet entities when creating solids. Chamfer. and/or whole solid bodies to chamfer. on solids. you must select the outward direction (to distinguish it from the inward direction) at the end of the operation so that the system knows how to apply the inward and outward thickening values. faces. The following differences further distinguish the construction methods: ¨ You can use open or closed chains of curves when creating solids with the thin-wall construction method. ¨ When extruding open chains of curves using the thin-wall construction method. 202 . You can then thicken sheet entities to create closed solid bodies. cut. you must use the default extrusion direction. regardless of the changes. Mastercam does let you create sheet entities by stitching surfaces or by removing faces from a solid. Solids. Choose Main Menu. 3. ¨ With the regular construction method. If edges are added to or removed from a chamfered face or body. Note: Chamfers that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole solid bodies are associative. which is normal to the first selected chain of curves. With the thin-wall construction method. ¨ When you extrude or revolve open chains of curves using the thin-wall construction method. then choose Done.

Mastercam displays the Pick Reference Face menu. Chamfer. Select one of the two faces that are adjacent to the edge. Solids. then choose OK to chamfer the edges. See "Defining a reference face" in the Related Topics below for more information. Dist/Ang. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. If you selected an edge. regardless of the changes. 5. Select a face or an edge. Choose Main Menu. 1. If edges are added to or removed from a chamfered face or body. then choose OK to chamfer the edges. the entire face or body remains chamfered. The Chamfer Parameters dialog box opens. which determine where the chamfer is positioned along the edge faces. regardless of the changes. Set parameters on the dialog box as needed. Solids. If you selected an edge. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select additional faces and/or edges. Note: Mastercam uses this face to calculate the distance and angle that you define in step 5. 2. 3. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select additional faces and/or edges. 4. Chamfering a solid using two distances This function defines a chamfer using two distances. Chamfer. Choose Main Menu. Chamfering a solid using a distance and an angle This function defines a chamfer using a distance and an angle. which determine where the chamfer is positioned along the edge faces. The Chamfer Parameters dialog box opens. Select one of the two faces that are adjacent to the edge. 3. 2. 2 Distances. then choose Done. 203 . then choose Done. then choose Done. 5. Note: Chamfers that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole solid bodies are associative. the entire face or body remains chamfered. See "Defining a reference face" in the Related Topics below for more information. Mastercam displays the Pick Reference Face menu. 1. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu.Note: Chamfers that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole solid bodies are associative. If edges are added to or removed from a chamfered face or body. then choose Done. Note: Mastercam uses this face to calculate the first distance that you define in step 5. Select a face or an edge. Set parameters on the dialog box as needed.

Choose Main Menu. Solids. Mastercam displays the Define Plane menu.Note: Chamfers that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole solid bodies are associative. Next menu. then choose Done. Flip : Reverses the trimming direction. Select one or more solids in the graphics window. 2. Mastercam selects it automatically. the entire face or body remains chamfered. or to an open sheet body. Trim. If edges are added to or removed from a chamfered face or body. Sheet : Trims the solids to an open sheet solid that you select in the graphics window. Trim). Name : Returns you to the prompt area where you can name the solid trim operation. Trimming solids to a plane 1. 204 . removes trimmed parts from the drawing. and for choosing whether or not to keep what was trimmed as new "bricks" (solid bodies with no history). and this step is unnecessary. Solids. Mastercam displays this menu after you select the solids you want to trim (Main Menu. to a surface. The direction arrow in the graphics window points to the side of the plane on which the solids will not be trimmed. regardless of the changes. The default name is Trim. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. 3. keeps trimmed parts in the drawing as brick solids. Next menu. When set to Y. Choose Plane from the Trim Solids menu. Plane : Trims the solids to a plane that you define using the Define Plane menu. Trimming solids The Trim Solids menu gives you options for trimming selected solids to a plane. Surface : Trims the solids to a surface that you select in the graphics window. Keep All : When set to N.

to reverse the trimming direction. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. set Keep All to N. Mastercam displays a temporary plane marker in the graphics window. If you choose not to name the operation. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the surface. To keep trimmed parts as bricks. To remove trimmed parts from the drawing. Select a surface in the graphics window. if necessary. set Keep All to Y. Choose Surface from the Trim Solids menu. 5. and this step is unnecessary. Note: You can recreate trimmed parts as bricks at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area. 8. Mastercam selects it automatically. 205 . the resulting disjoint pieces are represented as brick solids with no history. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. if necessary. If you choose not to name the operation. Choose Name. Notes: ¨ The trimming plane must fully intersect a selected solid in order to trim it. 5. Note: You can recreate trimmed parts as bricks at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. Trim. Trimming solids to a surface 1. Select one or more solids in the graphics window. 6. The arrow points to the side of the plane on which the solids will not be trimmed and which retain the history.4. Note: This step is optional. which points to the side of the surface on which the solids will not be trimmed and which retain the history. The remaining solid (on the side with the direction arrow) maintains the history. Define the trimming plane. Choose Done to trim the solids. To remove trimmed parts from the drawing. Note: This step is optional. Choose Flip. 4. 2. To keep trimmed parts as bricks. then choose Done. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. 3. set Keep All to Y. 6. Next menu. set Keep All to N. 7. Choose Name. Mastercam names it "Trim" by default. then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area. Solids. Mastercam names it "Trim" by default. to reverse the trimming direction. Choose Flip. Choose Main Menu. 7. ¨ When trimmed parts are kept in a drawing.

Mastercam renders the trim operation invalid. 7. and this step is unnecessary. Select an open sheet body in the graphics window. Note: You can recreate trimmed parts as bricks at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. 4. then choose Done. which points to the side of the sheet body on which the solids will not be trimmed and which retain the history. move. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the surface. . 3. or in any other way change the trimming surface so that it no longer fully intersects the solid. If you delete. set Keep All to Y. 2. Solids. To remove trimmed parts from the drawing. Select one or more solids in the graphics window. ¨ You can trim a solid to multiple surfaces by first stitching those surfaces into an open sheet body and then trimming to a sheet. or in any other way change the trimming surface so that it no longer fully intersects the solid. Notes: ¨ The edges and faces that are created as a result of the trim operation are associated with the trimming surface. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. 5. Trim. Next menu. The remaining solid (on the side with the direction arrow) maintains the history. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. Trimming solids to a sheet 1. If you delete. Notes: Choose Done to trim the solids. Choose Main Menu. Choose Name. 6. 206 Choose Done to trim the solids. ¨ The edges and faces that are created as a result of the trim operation are associated with the trimming surface. Choose Sheet from the Trim Solids menu. then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area. If you choose not to name the operation. the resulting disjoint pieces are represented as brick solids with no history. set Keep All to N. to reverse the trimming direction. ¨ When trimmed parts are kept in a drawing.8. ¨ The trimming surface must fully intersect a selected solid in order to trim it. Mastercam renders the trim operation invalid. Choose Flip. To keep trimmed parts as bricks. if necessary. Mastercam selects it automatically. move. 8. Mastercam names it "Trim" by default. Note: This step is optional.

Filleting solid edges The Fillet function that you access from the Solids menu lets you fillet the edges of solids. 3. You determine the extent of the fillet by specifying the radius of the rolling ball or crosssection. 1. If you select individual faces on a solid. Select the faces and/or whole solid bodies to shell. Note: When you shell whole solids. Similarly. and you cannot see into the solid if it is shaded. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. 2. you can turn on the display of hidden lines to distinguish the solid’s inner walls. Fillet. Filleting is a type of edge blending that results in a rounded edge by introducing new faces that are tangent to the edges’ adjacent faces. Solids. Set the shell direction and thickness as needed.¨ The trimming surface must fully intersect a selected solid in order to trim it. ¨ When trimmed parts are kept in a drawing. Select one or more edges. 3. The remaining solid (on the side with the direction arrow) maintains the history. and thickens the remaining faces to form the solid’s shell. you can visualize the void in the interior of the solid if you use translucent shading. opens the selected faces to form entry holes into the solid. Filleting solid edges using a constant radius 1. The Shell Solid dialog box opens. 2. the resulting disjoint pieces are represented as brick solids with no history. which leaves a void. Shell. there are no entry holes into the solid. Note: Fillets that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole solid bodies are associative. the system hollows the solid. If edges are added to or removed from a filleted face or body. the system removes the material from the interior of the solid. then choose Done. 207 . as if a ball is rolled along each selected edge and material is either added to or removed from the ball’s path to form the smooth edge. faces. A fillet is also referred to as a rolling ball blend because it has a circular cross-section. Choose Main Menu. and/or whole solid bodies. Shelling solids The Shell function lets you hollow solid bodies by removing material and optionally leaving selected faces open. Solids. Choose Main Menu. If you select a whole solid body and no individual faces. then choose Done. However. The remaining faces are thickened by a specified amount. ¨ You can trim a solid to multiple surfaces by first stitching those surfaces into an open sheet body and then trimming to a sheet. Choose Constant Radius. regardless of the change. then choose OK to shell the selected solids. You can define the fillet’s radius using a constant radius value or by varying the radius value along the edge. the entire face or body remains filleted. and thickens the solid’s faces to form the solid’s shell.

Select an edge on the solid that you are filleting or editing. 2. then click. enter a value for radius. the entire face or body remains filleted. choose the Edit button on the Fillet Parameters dialog box during the creation or editing of a solid fillet operation. Note: This menu can be accessed by choosing Edit from the Fillet Parameters dialog box when creating or editing a solid fillet operation using a variable radius. Select one or more edges. Use the mouse to slide the base of the arrow to the location where you want to insert a radius. You can use this menu to insert a radius. type [S] to activate snapping. 208 . Fillet. Choose Insert Mid from the Fillet Edit menu. 5. and change radius values. regardless of the change. Choose Main Menu. Choose Variable Radius. Inserting a radius midway between two existing radii along a solid edge 1. Mastercam marks the position of the radius with a display point in the graphics window. Solids. See the related topics below for more information. Set other parameters and edit radii as needed. Note: To enter a radius at the position of an existing point. Inserting a radius at any position along a solid edge 1. In the prompt area. Choose Insert Dyn from the Fillet Edit menu. move the cursor crosshair over the point. Note: You cannot create variable radius fillets if your selection includes solid faces or whole solid bodies. 3. Set other parameters as needed. Continue to edit the filleted edges. Mastercam displays a dynamic arrow on the selected edge. Varying the radius along filleted solid edges The Fillet Edit menu gives you options for editing the radius of solid fillet operations that are defined using a variable radius. 2. then choose OK to create the fillets. then choose Done. check radius values. To access this menu. 4. Note: Fillets that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole solid bodies are associative. If edges are added to or removed from a filleted face or body. Filleting solid edges using a variable radius 1. 3. remove a radius. then click to snap to the point. then choose OK to create the fillets. 4. or choose Done to exit the Fillet Edit menu.4.

Choose Modify Rad from the Fillet Edit menu. 4. select the display point that marks the location of the radius that you want to edit. Continue to edit the filleted edges. or choose Done to exit the Fillet Edit menu. 2. then click to snap to the point. type [S] to activate snapping. Removing a radius from a solid edge 1. Select an edge on the solid that you are filleting or editing. Continue to edit the filleted edges. 4. See the related topics below for more information. In the prompt area. Mastercam displays the current value of the radius. Note: This menu can be accessed by choosing Edit from the Fillet Parameters dialog box when creating or editing a solid fillet operation using a variable radius. select the display point that marks the location of the radius that you want to edit. move the cursor crosshair over the point. or choose Done to exit the Fillet Edit menu. See the related topics below for more information. 2. or choose Done to exit the Fillet Edit menu. Note: This menu can be accessed by choosing Edit from the Fillet Parameters dialog box when creating or editing a solid fillet operation using a variable radius. Continue to edit the filleted edges. Mastercam displays a dynamic arrow on the radius marker. Note: This menu can be accessed by choosing Edit from the Fillet Parameters dialog box when creating or editing a solid fillet operation using a variable radius. Choose Remove from the Fillet Edit menu. Use the mouse to slide the base of the arrow to the location where you want to position the radius. 3. Mastercam displays a temporary point to mark the midpoint between the two closest radii. See the related topics below for more information. Choose Modify Pos from the Fillet Edit menu. enter a value for radius. 2. 3. Note: You can also change the value of a radius by selecting it in the edge list of the Fillet Parameters dialog box. 3.Note: This menu can be accessed by choosing Edit from the Fillet Parameters dialog box when creating or editing a solid fillet operation using a variable radius. In the prompt area. Changing the position of a radius on a solid edge 1. 209 . then typing a new value in the Radius text box. 4. enter a new value for radius. See the related topics below for more information. In the graphics window. then click. In the graphics window. Changing the value of a radius on a solid edge 1. Note: To position the radius at the location of an existing point.

The method that you use determines where a drafted face hinges. Mastercam exits the function. or remove draft from a face. ¨ To maintain the current value of the highlighted radius. After the last radius. a filleted face can be drafted. 3. Mastercam removes the display point at this location. Note: You can also check and change the value of a radius marker by selecting it in the edge list of the Fillet Parameters dialog box. select the display point that marks the location of the radius that you want to remove. or choose Done to exit the Fillet Edit menu. Checking and changing radius values on a solid edge 1. like a chamfered face. See the related topics below for more information. drafting results in faces being deleted from the solid. For example. Note: This menu can be accessed by choosing Edit from the Fillet Parameters dialog box when creating or editing a solid fillet operation using a variable radius. Take one of the following actions: ¨ To change the value of the highlighted radius. You can draft virtually any solid face. In the graphics window.2. Repeat step 2 to check the remaining radius values. The Draft Faces function lets you add draft to a face. If the adjacent faces are unable to accommodate the new geometry. or choose Done to exit the Fillet Edit menu. Drafting solid faces using a reference face 210 . The Draft Faces function gives you four methods of drafting solid faces. Choose Cycle from the Fillet Edit menu. Continue to edit the filleted edges. it has the effect of creating a tapered wall. then choosing Remove from the right-click menu. press [Enter]. In some cases. When a face is drafted. Note: You can also remove a radius marker by right-clicking to select it in the edge list of the Fillet Parameters dialog box. 2. then typing a new value in the Radius text box. change draft on a face. Drafting solid faces Drafting solid faces is the process of tilting the faces by a defined angle and direction. 4. Mastercam highlights a display point that marks the location of a radius and displays the radius value at this location. type a new value for radius in the prompt area. When draft is added to a solid face. 3. Mastercam cycles to the next radius. which is particularly useful for mold-making. regardless of whether the solid was created in Mastercam or imported from a Parasolid file. Continue to edit the filleted edges. the operation fails. the adjacent faces are trimmed and/or extended to accommodate the new geometry of the drafted face. then press [Enter]. which changes its geometry from cylindrical to planar. Failure is more likely to occur with larger draft angles or if adjacent faces are tangent (or near tangent) and are not also being drafted.

Select a planar solid face. where one face is drafted using the Draft to Face method. Choose OK. ¨ When you select multiple faces to draft. 6. 7. Choose Main Menu. The hinge point can be located on or off the solid. ¨ The following graphics show the side view of a solid. The operation fails if there is no intersection. Note: A larger value results in more tilt. Choose Draft to Face. 3. Draft faces. See the graphic following the procedure for more information. Mastercam opens the Draft Face Parameters dialog box. Failure is more likely with a larger angle. choose Reverse it to flip the draft direction. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. If needed. which is used to calculate where the drafted face hinges and the draft direction. Select one or more faces to draft. Enter a value for Draft Angle. 2.The Draft to Face method requires you to select a planar reference face. then choose Done. 1. Mastercam displays a cone-shaped graphic and arrow on the reference face to indicate the draft direction and how the inward/outward nature of the draft angle relates to the direction. The first graphic illustrates how the hinge point. Mastercam will create a separate Draft Face operation for each solid. The draft direction is perpendicular to the reference face. This value determines how much the selected faces are tilted. and the draft angle is measured with respect to the direction. Next menu. and draft angle are calculated. then choose Done. The drafted face hinges at the intersection of the original face (the face selected to be drafted) and the reference face. draft direction. Changes that you make to the solid to alter the position or orientation of the reference face are reflected in the associated operations. 4. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. Note: You can extend the draft along tangent faces by checking Propagate along tangencies on the Draft Face Parameters dialog box before choosing OK. the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted. 5. 211 . Notes: ¨ The reference face that you select for the draft plane in step 6 is associated with the resulting Draft Face operations. The second graphic shows the drafted face and how the adjacent faces were extended to accommodate it. Note: You can select faces from more than one solid. This face must have an intersection with the face(s) being drafted. Solids.

Next menu. The draft direction is perpendicular to the reference plane. Solids. and the draft angle is measured with respect to the direction. The hinge point can be located on or off the solid. 1. See the graphic following the procedure for more information. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu 2. Select one or more faces to draft. Note: You can select faces from more than one solid. then choose Done. The operation fails if there is no intersection.Drafting solid faces using a reference plane The Draft to Plane method requires you to define a reference plane. Draft faces. Mastercam opens the Draft Face Parameters dialog box. The drafted face hinges at the intersection of the original face (the face selected to be drafted) and the reference plane. Mastercam will create a separate Draft Face operation for each solid. 212 . which is used to calculate where the drafted face hinges and the draft direction.

The following graphics show the left side of a block drafted using the XY plane with a Z value of . Notes: ¨ The reference plane that you define in step 6 is not associated with the resulting Draft Face operations. Failure is more likely with a larger angle. The reference edges that you select define the hinge points for the drafted faces. Note: A larger value results in more tilt. then choose Done. the draft direction follows the edge. ¨ ¨ When you select multiple faces to draft. Drafting solid faces using one or more reference edges The Draft to Edge method requires you to select one or more edges on each face being drafted. This plane must have an intersection with the face(s) being drafted. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Define Plane menu. Choose Draft to Plane. 6. If needed. the draft direction is perpendicular to the face. 7. the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted. choose Reverse it to flip the draft direction. even if you defined the plane using geometry. 213 .5. Mastercam displays a cone-shaped graphic and arrow on the reference plane to indicate the draft direction and how the inward/outward nature of the draft angle relates to the direction. This value determines how much the selected faces are tilted. such as a geometric line. Define the reference plane. a solid face. Enter a value for Draft Angle. 4. The draft angle is measured with respect to the direction. 5. etc. The draft direction is defined by a selected linear edge or planar face. Choose OK. For a planar face.3. For a linear edge.

choose Reverse it to flip the draft direction. This application of this draft method has limited uses and fails if the edges overlap or turn back on themselves when looked at in the draft direction. Repeat step 6 for each additional face. The following graphics show a face that is successfully drafted using multiple reference edges (highlighted in red). Solids. Choose Draft to Edge. Changes that you make to the solid to alter the position or orientation of the reference edges or linear edge or planar face are reflected in the associated operations. Mastercam will create a separate Draft Face operation for each solid. then choose Done. 6. 4. then choose Done. Mastercam attempts to break the original face into multiple drafted faces. 3. 9. 5.1. Choose OK. Note: You can select faces from more than one solid. ¨ When multiple edges are selected for a face. the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted. 8. Select one or more faces to draft. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. Enter a value for Draft Angle. 7. Notes: ¨ The reference edges that you select in steps 6 and 7 and the linear edge or planar face that you select in step 8 are associated with the resulting Draft Face operations. Failure is more likely with a larger angle. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. such as with a dovetail shape. 2. Draft faces. Mastercam opens the Draft Face Parameters dialog box. Select one or more reference edges on the face that is currently highlighted in the graphics window. Mastercam cycles to the next selected face if more than one face was selected in step 2. 214 . then choose Done. Choose Main Menu. a separate face corresponding to each reference edge. This value determines how much the selected faces are tilted. Mastercam displays a cone-shaped graphic and arrow along the edge or on the face to indicate the draft direction and how the inward/outward nature of the draft angle relates to the direction. ¨ When you select multiple faces to draft. Next menu. Specify the draft direction by selecting a linear edge or a planar face. The reference edges define the hinge points for the drafted face. Note: A larger value results in more tilt. If needed.

Enter a value for Draft Angle. 1. all of the lateral faces are drafted using the same draft angle and direction. Notes: ¨ A larger value results in more tilt. Note: You can select faces from more than one solid. you have the option to draft the resulting lateral faces. 5. The draft direction follows the extrusion direction. Solids. 3. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. Note: When you perform an extrude operation. Mastercam will create a separate Draft Faces operation for each solid. However. Mastercam opens the Draft Face Parameters dialog box. choose Done. Failure is more likely with a larger angle. Draft faces. 4. All of the faces that you select must be lateral faces (walls) swept out from an extrude operation. Notes: 215 Choose OK to draft the faces. Choose Draft Extrude. Next menu. After selecting the faces. . Select one or more faces to draft. This value determines how much the selected faces are tilted.Drafting solid faces for an extrude operation The Draft Extrude method requires you to select lateral faces (walls) swept out from an extrude operation. A negative value is measured with respect to the direction opposite the extrusion direction. 2. ¨ This value can be positive or negative. and the draft angle is measured with respect to this direction. Choose Main Menu. The drafted faces hinge at the intersection of the original faces (the faces selected to be drafted) with the planar chains of curves that defined the original extrude operation. A positive value is measured with respect to the extrusion direction.

all other material will be removed. material will be kept. Regardless of the number of tool bodies you use. In places where the tool bodies that you select in step 4 and the target body that you select in step 3 overlap. Boolean. choose Add. Solids. which are the solids that are added to. which displays when you choose Boolean from the Solids menu. or overlapped. which results in cuts on the target body. When performing a Boolean function. Performing a Boolean operation The Boolean menu. lets you select from several types of Boolean functions. 2. choose Common. Choose Main Menu. 216 . and find the common region defined by overlapping solids. choose Remove. material will be removed. ¨ The following graphics show an extruded solid whose lateral faces have been drafted along the extrusion direction. the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted.¨ When you select multiple faces to draft. removed from. In places where the tool bodies that you select in step 4 intersect the target body that you select in step 3. 1. removed from. subtract solids from one another. Material from the tool bodies that you select in step 4 will be added to the target body that you select in step 3. ¨ To remove solids from one another. Boolean functions let you construct a solid using combinations of two or more existing solids. Indicate the type of Boolean operation to perform: ¨ To add solids together. This is the solid that material is added to. You can add solids together. or overlapped with the target body. the result of each Boolean operation is always a single body. You then select one or more tool bodies. Mastercam displays the Boolean menu. ¨ To find common solid regions. The curves that defined the original extrude operation are highlighted in red and now form the hinges for the drafted faces. you must first identify a target body.

Marks an invalid operation. 4. Indicates that the move is allowed when dragging an operation in the operation list. Each symbol is described below: Symbol Description Marks a dirty operation. without changing either the target or the tool. Symbols used in the Solids Manager The Solids Manager uses many symbols to communicate information about operations. 5. An operation is invalid when a change has been made that Mastercam is unable to incorporate into the model. Indicates that there are additional operation details. then choose Done to perform the Boolean operation. Select one or more tool bodies. You can drag operations to roll back a solid or to change the operation order. An operation is dirty when its parameters and/or geometry have been modified. then regenerating the solid. Note: Mastercam is unable to create disjoint bodies and maintain associativity between them. If a Boolean Remove or Common operation fails because it would create a disjoint body. To correct an invalid solid. Respond in one of the following ways: ¨ Choose Yes to continue the Boolean operation and display the Keep menu. try adjusting the parameters or geometry of any invalid operations. thus preventing the solid from being rebuilt. You can drag operations to roll back a solid or to change the operation order. Then choose Done to complete the Boolean operation. You can roll back a solid to a previous state by dragging the stop operation icon to a new position in the operation list. Select a target body. Set Tools to Y (keep tool body) or N (remove tool body). You must regenerate the solid in order for the changes to be incorporated into the model at which point the operation will be ‘clean’ and the dirty symbol will be removed. Set Target to Y (keep target body) or N (remove target body). 217 . Marks the end of the operations that define a solid. Clicking on this symbol expands the tree structure of operation details. a message displays giving you the option to create a non-associative Boolean (a brick solid). Creating and keeping a non-associative Boolean will create entirely new brick solids that represent the resulting disjoint pieces. ¨ Choose No to cancel the Boolean operation. Indicates that the move is not allowed when dragging an operation in the operation list.3.

Indicates a Primitive Cylinder operation. it indicates that the operation has been suppressed and/or that the solid is in a rolled back state. 218 . Indicates a tool body or solid that is used in the associated Boolean operation. Indicates a Shell operation. Indicates a Fillet operation. Double-click this icon to edit the parameters. Indicates that there is editable geometry for this operation.Indicates that the operation details are expanded. When an icon has been grayed out. Indicates a Mill or Lathe toolpath operation. Indicates an Extrude. Clicking on this symbol collapses the tree structure of operation details. or Sweep operation. Indicates a Chamfer operation. Indicates a Revolve operation. Double-click this icon to edit the geometry. Indicates a Primitive Cone operation. Loft. Indicates a Boolean operation. Indicates that there are editable parameters for this operation. Indicates a solid.

Choose Main Menu. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Deleting solids and solid operations 1. your actions could render the model invalid when you restore the suppressed operations. See the related topics below for more information. Right-click in the dialog box. If you selected operations to delete in step 3. Mastercam marks the corresponding solid dirty. ¨ You cannot delete base operations or tool bodies. Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. Indicates a Primitive Sphere operation. Due to the dependent nature of solid operations. bodies) is dependent on the deleted operation. Note: You can select multiple operations from a single solid only. 3. This way you can check the model in various states without having to delete and recreate operations. 4. Suppressing solid operations The Suppress function lets you build a solid without factoring in selected operations. 2. Solids. ¨ You can use Mastercam’s Delete function to delete and restore solids. Notes: ¨ Mastercam automatically deletes all operations whose input (selected faces. its tool bodies are restored as distinct solids that are no longer associated with the target body. box. edges. ¨ If you delete a Boolean operation. Indicates a Primitive Torus operation. It is important that you use the Suppress function only as a temporary model checking feature and that you pay attention to what actions you take while operations are suppressed. Indicates a Draft Face operation. or press the Delete key on your keyboard. then choose Delete. 219 .Indicates a Primitive Block operation. but not individual operations. Indicates a Trim operation. Mastercam opens the Solids Manager dialog Select one or more solids or solid operations to delete.

Solids. and the operation is restored. or revert. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. the operation is inserted after the final operation in the list. 2. Notes: ¨ A check mark displays next to the Suppress icon on the right-click menu of each suppressed operation. When you select the Suppress option a second time. Due to the dependent nature of solid operations. The roll back feature is commonly used to fix invalid operations or to build a model one operation at a time when you are editing operations. To restore a suppressed operation. the check mark is cleared. have a stop operation icon that marks the end of the operations that define the solid. Solids mgr. When a solid is in a rolled back state. ¨ You cannot suppress a base operation. Choose Main Menu. However. the system automatically suppresses them. as well. a solid to an earlier stage in its development by moving the Stop Op icon to different positions in the operation list. If other operations are dependent on the suppressed operation. your actions could render the model invalid when you return the stop operation to the end of the solid. ¨ To return the solid to its original state. You can roll back. Notes: ¨ The stop operation is inserted after the operation on which you release it. Choose Main Menu. 3. Select one or more operations to suppress. you cannot edit its parameters or geometry or select it for use in any other operation. including tool bodies. When you release the mouse button. 3. then release the mouse button. 2. drag the Stop Op icon to the last operation in the list. The system rebuilds the model up to the stop operation.1. Select a stop operation to roll back. Right-click in the dialog box. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Drag it up through the history tree until it is positioned over a selected operation. the system builds the model to the stop point only. ¨ While an operation is suppressed. 1. it is extremely important that you roll back a solid only as a temporary model checking feature and that you pay attention to what actions you take while the solid is rolled back. follow the steps above. Note: You can select multiple operations from a single solid only. Mastercam rebuilds the model without the selected operations and grays out the icons of the suppressed operations in the list. then choose Suppress. Rolling back a solid All solids listed in the Solids Manager. the operation can be unsuppressed only by unsuppressing the operation on which it is dependent. All operations beyond the stop point are suppressed and are grayed out in the operation list. If the operation is suppressed and does not have a check mark next to the Suppress option. Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. 220 . Solids.

¨ When a solid is rolled back, operations that you perform are added to the end of the active operations in the model (before the stop point), instead of at the end of the operation list. Therefore, you may find the roll back function a useful way to insert an operation in the middle of the operation list instead of adding it to the end of the list, then dragging to the correct position, which sometimes fails due to operation dependencies. Identifying a solid operation based on its geometry You can identify an operation in the Solids Manager by selecting geometry in the graphics window. Mastercam matches the selected geometry (a solid face) with the operation that is defined by the geometry. This function is particularly useful when you are working on a complex solid that has a large number of operations. You can quickly identify the operation you’re looking for instead of having to check multiple operations using automatic or manual highlighting. Note: For more information on highlighting, see the related topics below. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Choose Select. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window.

3. Select a solid face. Mastercam reopens the Solids Manager with the corresponding operation selected.

Renaming solids and solid operations The name assigned to a solid or solid operation can help identify it in the operation list of the Solids Manager. When you perform a solid operation, you have the option to assign it a unique name, or you can accept the default name, which reflects the operation type (e.g., Extrude Cut, Boolean Remove, Fillet, etc.). Unlike solid operations, solids cannot be assigned unique names when they are created. However, you can rename both solids and solid operations at any time from the Solids Manager. 1. 2. 3. field. 4. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Select a solid or operation. Right-click on the selected item, then choose Rename. The current name changes to an editable

Type a new name, then press [Enter].

Note: You can also rename an operation by editing the operation’s parameters and entering a new name in the Name field. Changing the order of solid operations The Solids Manager lists the operations that define each solid in the current file. The operations are listed in the order in which they are performed on the solid. You can change the order by dragging operations to new positions in the operation list. Mastercam will rebuild the solid based on the new operation order.

221

1. 2.

Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Select an operation to move.

3. With the mouse button pressed, drag the operation to the desired position in the operation list, then release the mouse button. Mastercam rebuilds the solid using the current operation order. Notes: ¨ The selected operation is inserted after the operation on which you release it.

¨ As you drag an operation, the cursor changes to a downward arrow if the move is allowed or to a circle with a slash through it if the move is not allowed. The following moves are not allowed: ¨ ¨ You cannot move a base operation. You cannot move an operation to a position before a base operation.

¨ If an operation is dependent on one or more other operations, you cannot move it to a position ahead of the operation(s) on which it is dependent in the list.

Regenerating solids Regeneration is the process of rebuilding a solid so that it matches its associated operations. Regeneration is required when a solid becomes dirty or invalid due to changes that you make to the parameters and/or geometry of one or more of the solid’s operations. When you regenerate a solid, Mastercam incorporates your changes into the solid and restores the solid to a clean state, if possible. Regeneration fails if a solid has one or more invalid operations. When making a lot of changes to a model, it is useful to regenerate often. This way, if regeneration fails, you will have to make fewer corrections to return the operation to a valid state. For more information on dirty and invalid operations, see the related topics below. 1. 2. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Take one of the following actions: To regenerate all dirty or invalid solids, choose Regen All. To regenerate an individual solid, right-click to select the solid, then choose Regen Solid.

Accessing Solids menu options from the Solids Manager You can access the Solids menu options from the Solids Manager, which enables you to perform new solid operations without having to exit the Solids Manager dialog box. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Right-click anywhere in the list of operations.

222

3. Choose Solids. Mastercam displays a flyout menu containing all of the Solids menu options. For more information, see the related topics. Accessing the toolpath Operations Manager from the Solids Manager You can access the toolpath Operations Manager from the Solids Manager, which enables you to edit Mill or Lathe toolpaths that were created on solids and to access other toolpath functions without having to exit the Solids Manager dialog box. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Right-click anywhere in the list of operations.

3. Choose Operations Manager. Mastercam closes the Solids Manager dialog box and opens the Operations Manager dialog box. 4. Perform functions from the toolpath Operations Manager, as needed. When you close the Operations Manager, Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager. Note: For information on the toolpath Operations Manager, see the related topics below. Expanding and collapsing solid operation details The Solids Manager lists the operation history for each solid in the current file. You can expand or collapse the tree structure of a solid to show or hide a list of operations that define the solid. Likewise, you can expand or collapse the tree structure of each operation to show or hide its editable components (e.g., parameters and geometry). Note: Imported solids have no operation history. The tree structure of an imported solid lists only the operations that have been performed on the solid since it was imported into Mastercam. Expanding operation details 1. 2. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Take one of the following actions: To expand an individual operation, click on the plus (+) sign preceding the operation. To expand all operations for a solid, right-click on the solid, then choose Expand all.

Collapsing operation details 1. 2. ¨ ¨ Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Take one of the following actions: To collapse an individual operation, click on the minus (-) sign preceding the operation. To collapse all operations for a solid, right-click on the solid, then choose Collapse all.

Duplicating solids 223

You can make exact copies of solids, including tool bodies. Each copy is an active solid that you can select and edit. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Select one or more solids to copy.

3. Right-click in the dialog box, then choose Duplicate Solid. Mastercam creates a copy of each selected solid and lists the new solids at the end of the operation list in the Solids Manager. Note: This function is particularly useful if you want to use the same tool body to affect different target solids. Editing solid parameters You can edit the parameters that define a selected operation. Some of the original defining parameters, however, may not be editable. For example, you cannot change an extrude, revolve, sweep, or loft operation from a create to a cut or boss (or vice versa), but you can change any of these operations from a cut to a boss (or vice versa)—provided the change would not create disjoint bodies. There are no parameters to edit for Boolean and Trim operations. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Expand the list of components for the operation you want to edit, then double-click on Parameters.

3. Mastercam returns you to the dialog box or menu that is used to define the operation’s parameters. Make changes to the parameters, as needed, then choose OK to close the dialog box or Done to exit the menu. 4. Mastercam may require additional input, depending on the parameters that you edited. Follow the prompts on your screen. After all required input has been entered, the Solids Manager dialog box reopens. 5. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Editing solid attributes You can edit a solid’s attributes by accessing the Solid Attributes dialog box from the Solids Manager. 1. 2. 3. 4. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Select a solid. Right-click on the selected item, then choose Attributes. The Solid Attributes dialog box opens. Change one or more attributes, as follows:

¨ Level: Type the number of the level that you want to assign, or choose Level to select a level using the Level dialog box

224

¨ Color: Type the number of the color that you want to assign, or choose Color to select a color from the Color dialog box. ¨ ¨ 5. Notes: ¨ You can edit level and color attributes of a selected solid using the Attributes tab of the Analyze dialog box. ¨ You can set default entity attributes using the Screen tab and the CAD Settings tab of the System Configuration dialog box. ¨ If entities do not change color, it may be because selected entities are being displayed in a group color instead of an entity color. (See Assigning a color to a group.) To apply the color change to group/result entities, use the Screen, Clr function. Recreating trimmed bodies After a trim operation, you can recreate as brick solids the parts of the original solid that were trimmed away and deleted from the drawing. The effect is the same as if you had turned on the Keep All option during the initial trim operation. 1. 2. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Select a trim operation. Style: Select a line pattern from the drop-down list. Width: Select a line thickness from the drop-down list. Choose OK to apply the current Solid Attributes dialog box settings to the selected solid.

3. Right-click on the selected item, then choose Recreate trimmed bodies. The Solids Manager dialog box closes. After Mastercam completes the operation, the Solids Manager dialog box reopens and displays the recreated solid bodies (bricks) in the history tree below the original solid. Editing solid geometry You can edit solid operations that are defined by geometry (i.e., chains, edges, etc.) Each solid operation is associated with the solid on which the operation is performed. Changes that you make to an operation’s geometry (adding selections, deleting selections, etc.) can affect the selected operation and its associated solid only. Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid, but does support creation of brick solids by Trim and Boolean (Remove, Common) operations. Note: No geometry is editable for Boolean (Add, Remove, Common) or Primitive (Cone, Block, Cylinder, Torus, Sphere) operations. Editing chains for solid operations Mastercam opens the Solid Chain Manager dialog box when you edit the geometry of an Extrude, Revolve, Sweep, or Loft solid operation, since these operation types are defined by chains of curves. The dialog box lists the chains that currently define the selected operation and gives you options for adding chains, 225

3. it will read ‘Geometry’. Solids mgr. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. 2. then choose Add Chain. In addition. Editing geometry for Extrude operations You can edit the underlying chains of curves that define an extruded solid. Choose Main Menu. right-click on a chain in the list. you can edit the faces that an extruded cut or boss is trimmed to if the Trim to selected faces parameter was turned on when the operation was initially defined. then choose Delete Chain. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. The new chains are reflected in the list. Right-click anywhere in the dialog box. then choose Done. 226 . Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. cut. Right-click anywhere in the dialog box. and rechaining one or all of the chains. Expand the list of components for the Extrude operation you want to edit. then choose Done. then choose Done.deleting chains. To delete chains ¨ Right-click on the chain to delete. then choose Done. Select one or more chains. then double-click on Geometry . 2. Mastercam returns you to the Solid Chain Manager. 2. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. Mastercam returns you to the Solid Chain Manager. Steps for editing each of these components are given below. To add chains 1. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. Mastercam returns you to the Solid Chain Manager. 2. Take one or more of the following actions from the Solid Chain Manager dialog box: ¨ To add chains. which helps you identify chains to edit. To rechain all chains 1. Select one or more chains. then choose Rechain All. To rechain a selected chain 1. The new chains replace the chains that previously defined the operation. or boss. right-click anywhere in the dialog box. Right-click on a chain in the list. Note: If the selected solid has only one geometry component. Solids. Select one or more chains. then choose Rechain.Chains. To edit chains 1. The new chains replace the selected chain in the list. To access these editing options. Mastercam highlights the corresponding chain in the graphics window. Note: When you select a chain in the list. Select one or more chains. then choose Add Chain.

2. Choose Main Menu. To edit faces 1. right-click the chain to delete. The base chain is the outermost chain of curves. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and cancels the original face(s) to which the boss or cut was trimmed. 3. Expand the list of components for the Revolve operation you want to edit. Note: The faces that you select must be located on the solid with which the operation being edited was originally associated. ¨ Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. 2. Editing geometry for Revolve operations You can edit the underlying chains of curves that define a revolved solid. Select one or more new faces. The chains that are nested within this boundary form cutouts in the solid. then double-click on Geometry. 227 . ¨ To rechain all of the chains. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Expand the list of components for the Extrude operation you want to edit. Notes: ¨ You cannot delete the base chain. Solids. then choose Done. cut. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. Choose Main Menu. ¨ The Extrude operation can have more than one chain only if there is an outermost chain that defines a closed boundary around the other chains. Solids mgr. which defines the outer boundary. then double-click on Geometry – Faces. right-click anywhere in the dialog box. 1.¨ To delete a chain. You cannot use the thin-wall construction method in this case. 4. ¨ To rechain a selected chain. then choose Done. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Select one or more chains to replace the selected chain. Choose OK to close the Solid Chain Manager. Select one or more chains to replace the original chains. Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager dialog box and marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. or cross-section. then choose Done. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. then choose Delete Chain. 5. then choose Rechain. or boss. then choose Rechain All. Solids mgr. Solids. 4. of the solid. right-click it in the dialog box. Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager dialog box and marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty.

you must edit the solid’s parameters. The base chain is the outermost chain of curves. right-click anywhere in the dialog box. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Select one or more chains. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. ¨ The Revolve operation can have more than one chain only if there is an outermost chain that defines a closed boundary around the other chains. Solids. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. then double-click on Geometry – Section Chain. cut. 3. You cannot use the thin-wall construction method in this case. ¨ To delete a chain. then choose Done. To edit the section chain 1. ¨ To rechain a selected chain. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. right-click it in the dialog box. Choose OK to close the Solid Chain Manager. 4. Expand the list of components for the Sweep operation you want to edit. cut. then choose Rechain All. Select one or more chains. cut. then choose Done. right-click anywhere in the dialog box. Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager dialog box and marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. right-click anywhere in the dialog box. Take one or more of the following actions from the Solid Chain Manager dialog box: ¨ To add chains. then choose Add Chain. Select one or more chains to replace the original chains. or boss. Solids mgr. Editing geometry for Sweep operations Each Sweep operation has two editable geometry components: the underlying chains of curves (called section chains) that define a swept solid. Choose Main Menu. 228 . ¨ To edit the rotation axis of a revolved solid. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. then choose Done. which defines the outer boundary. 2.3. or cross-section. then choose Done. or boss and the chain of curves (called a path chain) that defines the path along which the section chains are swept to form the solid. or boss. right-click the chain to delete. ¨ To rechain all of the chains. of the solid. The chains that are nested within this boundary form cutouts in the solid. Take one or more of the following actions from the Solid Chain Manager dialog box: ¨ To add chains. then choose Add Chain. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. Steps for editing each of these components are given below. ¨ Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. Select one or more chains to replace the selected chain. then choose Rechain. See the related topics below for more information. then choose Delete Chain. Notes: ¨ You cannot delete the base chain. 5.

Choose Main Menu. Select a chain of curves to be used as the path chain. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager dialog box and marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. 3. Solids mgr. then choose Rechain All. 1. 5. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window in chaining mode. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. 3. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. Select one or more chains to replace the selected chain. which defines the outer boundary. or cross-section. ¨ Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. The chains that are nested within this boundary form cutouts in the solid. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. right-click it in the dialog box. Select one or more chains to replace the original chains. then double-click on Geometry. then double-click on Geometry – Path Chain. Solids mgr. right-click the chain to delete. ¨ To rechain a selected chain. Take one or more of the following actions from the Solid Chain Manager dialog box: 229 . Solids. The base chain is the outermost chain of curves. 4. 4. To edit the path chain 1. Expand the list of components for the Extrude operation you want to edit. of the solid. Notes: ¨ You cannot delete the base chain.¨ To delete a chain. Note: The selected chain must intersect the plane defined by the section chains. Choose OK to close the Solid Chain Manager. then choose Done. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager dialog box and marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. 2. 2. cut. right-click anywhere in the dialog box. Editing geometry for Loft operations You can edit the chains of curves that define the cross-sections of a lofted solid. or boss. ¨ The Sweep operation can have more than one chain only if there is an outermost chain that defines a closed boundary around the other chains. then choose Done. Expand the list of components for the Loft operation you want to edit. ¨ To rechain all of the chains. Solids. then choose Delete Chain. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. then choose Rechain.

Choose Main Menu. 230 . Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box. select unhighlighted edges. 1. Solids mgr. or the whole solid. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. Choose Main Menu. or the whole solid. then choose Done. then double-click on Geometry. 3. faces. then choose Rechain. Mastercam maintains your original selection of edges. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. 4. faces. 5. Note: Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. or the whole solid. ¨ To rechain all of the chains. Select one or more chains to replace the selected chain. Choose OK to close the Solid Chain Manager. Editing geometry for Fillet operations You can edit the edges that define a fillet operation. right-click the chain to delete. 4. Take one or both of the following actions: ¨ ¨ To fillet additional edges. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. then choose Done. 2. then choose Done. ¨ To delete a chain. Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager dialog box and marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Solids mgr. Note: If the fillet operation is defined as a variable radius fillet. Select one or more chains. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. right-click anywhere in the dialog box. Note: There must be a minimum of two closed. To remove filleting from edges. then choose Delete Chain. ¨ To rechain a selected chain. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Solids. right-click it in the dialog box. then choose Rechain All. 5. faces. 1. you will be able to select edges only. Solids. Select one or more chains to replace the original chains. select highlighted edges. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. right-click anywhere in the dialog box.¨ To add chains. then choose Add Chain. planar chains to define a lofted operation. Editing geometry for Chamfer operations You can edit the edges that define a chamfer operation. Expand the list of components for the Fillet operation you want to edit.

3. Mastercam cancels your original geometry selection. Note: Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. the system removes the material from the interior of the solid. then double-click on Geometry.2. Solids. Redefine the shell operation by selecting new faces and/or the whole solid. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. or the whole solid. Take one or both of the following actions: ¨ ¨ To chamfer additional edges. faces. faces. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box. 4. which leaves a void. opens the selected faces to form entry holes into the solid. 3. or the whole solid. 1. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. not the whole solid. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box. faces. Expand the list of components for the Chamfer operation you want to edit. the system hollows the solid. Mastercam maintains your original selection of edges. 4. Editing geometry for Trim operations 231 . and thickens the remaining faces to form the solid’s shell. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Notes: ¨ If you select individual faces on a solid. 5. or the whole solid. select unhighlighted edges. Note: Your selections are restricted to the solid on which the selected shell operation was originally defined. ¨ Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. and thickens the solid’s faces to form the solid’s shell. Choose Main Menu. Note: If the chamfer operation is defined using two distances or a distance and angle. Expand the list of components for the Shell operation you want to edit. then double-click on Geometry. To remove chamfering from edges. Solids mgr. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. 2. Editing geometry for Shell operations You can reselect the geometry that defines a shell operation. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. If you select a whole solid body and no individual faces. select highlighted edges. you will be able to select edges and faces only. 5.

¨ To trim the solid to a sheet. then double-click on Geometry. 4. 232 . choose Surface. ¨ When trimmed parts are kept in a drawing. 3. To keep trimmed parts as bricks. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on a plane marker or surface in the graphics window. To remove trimmed parts from the drawing. 1. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. set Keep All to Y. 6. The remaining solid (on the side with the direction arrow) maintains the history. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Choose Flip. choose Sheet. Expand the list of components for the Trim operation you want to edit. set Keep All to N. This arrow points to the side of the surface on which the solids will not be trimmed and which retain the history. Note: You can recreate trimmed parts as bricks at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y]. or in any other way change the trimming surface so that it no longer fully intersects the solid. Solids. Choose Main Menu. Choose Main Menu. choose Plane. 1. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Trim Solids menu. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. ¨ You can trim a solid to multiple surfaces by first stitching those surfaces into an open sheet body and then trimming to a sheet. then use the Define Plane menu to define a trimming plane. Solids. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box. Solids mgr. ¨ To trim the solid to a surface. 2. then select a trimming surface in the graphics window. 5. move. then select an open sheet body in the graphics window. Take one of the following actions to redefine the Trim operation: ¨ To trim the solid to a plane. If you delete.You can redefine the trimming geometry and direction of a Trim operation. Solids mgr. ¨ If the solid is trimmed to a surface. the edges and faces that are created as a result of the trim operation are associated with the surface. Mastercam renders the trim operation invalid. the resulting disjoint pieces are represented as brick solids with no history. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Editing geometry for Thicken operations You can redefine the thickening direction of a Thicken operation. Notes: ¨ The trimming plane or surface must fully intersect the solid in order to trim it. if necessary. to reverse the trimming direction.

then double-click on Geometry – Plane Face. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Click on the topics below for more information. This face must have an intersection with the face(s) being drafted. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. 3. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager. 4. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box. 3. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. This arrow points to the side of the solid which is thickened. you can edit the drafted faces and the reference face. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the solid in the graphics window. Select a new planar reference face. Note: Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. Solids mgr. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Sheet Thickening Direction menu. Editing geometry for Draft Face operations The editable geometry components for a Draft Face operation vary depending on how the operation was defined. Editing geometry for a Draft Face operation that was defined using a reference face For Draft Face operations defined using a reference face (Draft to Face option on the Draft Face Parameters dialog box). if necessary. 233 . Solids. Choose Main Menu. Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. 2. the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted. To draft additional faces. select unhighlighted faces. to reverse the thickening direction. Mastercam highlights the solid faces that are currently drafted for the selected operation. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. then double-click on Geometry. Choose Flip. select highlighted faces. To remove draft from faces. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Choose Main Menu. Take one or both of the following actions: ¨ ¨ 4. Solids. then double-click on Geometry – Faces. Note: When you select multiple faces to draft. Expand the list of components for the Thicken operation you want to edit. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Steps for editing each of these components are given below. 3. 2.2. The original reference face has been cancelled. To edit the reference face 1. To edit drafted faces 1. Solids mgr. Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. 5.

Solids. 5. 4. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. To edit drafted faces 1. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Solids mgr. 3. Define a new reference plane. the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted. Note: When you select multiple faces to draft. Note: The reference face that you select in step 3 is associated with the Draft Face operation being edited. 2. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. you can edit the drafted faces and the reference plane. select unhighlighted faces. To draft additional faces. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. To edit the reference plane 1. If needed.4. Mastercam displays a cone-shaped graphic and arrow on the reference plane to indicate the draft direction and how the inward/outward nature of the draft angle relates to the direction. 2. This plane must have an intersection with the face(s) being drafted. choose Reverse it to flip the draft direction. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Define Plane menu. Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit. Solids. Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit. then double-click on Geometry – Plane. Choose Main Menu. select highlighted faces. Mastercam highlights the solid faces that are currently drafted for the selected operation. then choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box. 234 . then choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box. Solids mgr. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. To remove draft from faces. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Changes that you make to the solid to alter the position or orientation of the reference face are reflected in the associated operation. Editing geometry for a Draft Face operation that was defined using a reference plane For Draft Face operations defined using a reference plane (Draft to Plane option on the Draft Face Parameters dialog box). If needed. Mastercam displays a cone-shaped graphic and arrow on the reference face to indicate the draft direction and how the inward/outward nature of the draft angle relates to the direction. then double-click on Geometry – Faces. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager. 3. Steps for editing each of these components are given below. Choose Main Menu. Note: Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. choose Reverse it to flip the draft direction. Take one or both of the following actions: ¨ ¨ 4. 5. The original reference plane has been cancelled.

Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Select one or more reference edges on the face that is currently highlighted in the graphics window. Notes: ¨ When you select multiple faces to draft. Mastercam reopens the Solids Manager dialog box. Steps for editing each of these components are given below. Mastercam cycles to the next face if more than one face was selected in step 3. 3. Changes that you make to the solid to alter the position or orientation of the reference face are reflected in the associated operation. This application of this draft method has limited uses and fails if the edges overlap or turn back on themselves when looked at in the draft direction. Mastercam highlights the solid faces that are currently drafted for the selected operation. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. To remove draft from faces. Changes that you make to the solid to alter the position or orientation of the reference face are reflected in the associated operation. Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit. a separate face corresponding to each reference edge. The reference edges define the hinge points for the drafted face. ¨ When multiple edges are selected for a face. Repeat step 5 for each additional face. then double-click on Geometry – Faces. To draft additional faces. To edit drafted faces 1. you can edit the drafted faces and the reference edges. Choose Main Menu. select unhighlighted faces. then choose Done. Take one or both of the following actions: ¨ ¨ 4.5. 2. Editing geometry for a Draft Face operation that was defined using reference edges For Draft Face operations defined using reference edges (Draft to Edge option on the Draft Face Parameters dialog box). 7. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. select highlighted faces. 235 . Choose Done. Solids. the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted. When you finish selecting edges for the last face. Note: Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. Mastercam attempts to break the original face into multiple drafted faces. Solids mgr. Note: The reference plane that you define in step 3 is associated with the Draft Face operation being edited. 6. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. such as with a dovetail shape. 5. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. ¨ The reference edges that you select in steps 5 and 6 are associated with the Draft Face operation being edited.

The geometry that defined the original direction has been cancelled. 3. 4. Choose Main Menu. Mastercam displays a cone-shaped graphic and arrow along the edge or on the face to indicate the draft direction and how the inward/outward nature of the draft angle relates to the direction. Editing geometry for a Draft Face operation that was defined using an existing Extrude operation For Draft Face operations defined using an existing Extrude operation (Draft Extrude option on the Draft Face Parameters dialog box). 2. Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit. select unhighlighted faces. Take one or both of the following actions: ¨ ¨ To draft additional faces. you can edit the drafted faces. 5. Note: When you select multiple faces to draft. then double-click on Geometry. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Solids mgr. choose Reverse it to flip the draft direction. Note: All of the faces that you select must be lateral faces (walls) swept out from the extrude operation. Note: Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid. 236 . Define a new draft direction by selecting a linear edge or planar face.To edit the reference plane 1. 2. If needed. 5. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. then double-click on Geometry – Direction. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. then choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. Note: The linear edge or planar face that you select in step 3 is associated with the Draft Face operation being edited. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model. Solids. Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit. 4. 3. the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted. Choose Main Menu. Solids. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu. Solids mgr. Changes that you make to the solid to alter the position or orientation of the reference face are reflected in the associated operation. select highlighted faces. To remove draft from faces. To edit drafted faces 1. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Mastercam highlights the solid faces that are currently drafted for the selected operation.

see the related topics below. Note: Highlighting an operation is a useful way to check and be sure you have selected the correct operation before editing it. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. 2. but you can still highlight selected operations manually. When you create operations. Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. you can also tell Mastercam whether or not to combine appropriate operations by combining selected chains (for holes) or edges (for fillets) into a single operation. 2. You can highlight operations automatically or manually. Right-click to select an operation. Mastercam uses the color red to highlight the wireframe geometry of the faces associated with the selected operation. such as holes and fillets.Highlighting solid operations Highlighting is used to identify the geometry associated with an operation. Creating solid operations adds them to the solid’s history tree. choose Auto-Highlight. Unlike auto-highlighting. Choose Main Menu. Auto-highlighting is turned on when there is a check mark next to the Auto-Highlight option and off when there is no check mark next to the option. For information on turning off autohighlighting. Removing features is useful when you need to create toolpaths that precede or ignore the features. Note: When the auto-highlight feature is off. 3.". For more information. where they can be modified using the Solids Manager. Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. Click on the topics below for more information. Finding solid features The Find Features function lets you find specified features. highlighting is disabled. Note: The Highlight option is grayed out if auto-highlighting is active. Right-click anywhere in the operation list. To change the status of the auto-highlight feature. 1. 237 . Solids. Mastercam highlights the corresponding geometry in the graphics window. Highlighting solid operations manually Manual highlighting is used to identify the geometry associated with a selected solid operation. It can be used only when auto-highlighting is turned off. the highlighting lasts for only a couple of seconds then disappears. Mastercam uses the color red to highlight the wireframe geometry of the faces associated with the operation that’s currently selected in the Solids Manager. Highlighting solid operations automatically The auto-highlight feature is an on/off toggle. Mastercam uses the color red to highlight the wireframe geometry of the faces associated with the selected operation. on imported bricks or other solid bodies whose base operation in the history is "Body. Unlike manual highlighting. When you select a feature to detect. see the related topics below. When it’s on. Choose Main Menu. the geometry remains highlighted until you select a different operation or close the Solids Manager dialog box. you can also tell Mastercam whether to remove detected instances of the feature or to recreate the operations and any associated geometry needed to reconstruct the detected instances of the feature. 1. then choose Highlight. Solids.

Choose OK to perform the function. invalid. and this step is unnecessary. Combining operations fillets similar edges as one operation in history. removing. 3. and creating holes on a solid body The Find Features function lets you detect. When finding and recreating holes in a single face. 6. Mastercam selects it automatically. and creating fillets on a solid body The Find Features function lets you detect. Combining operations aggregates multiple chains into one extrude cut operation. accept or change the values in the Minimum Radius and Maximum Radius text boxes. 4. the operation fails. Mastercam will try to extend one face and cap the hole in a single plane. Finding. If a hole cuts through multiple faces. clear Combine operations. If Mastercam cannot recreate the hole. Select one or more solids in the graphics window. or trim operations. remove. 5. choose Remove features.When operating on a brick. removing. Solids. Choose Main Menu. ¨ ¨ Under Feature. select Combine operations. and create through holes and blind holes (pass through solid in one direction) on brick solids. choose Create operations. remove. Boolean. indicate whether or not to combine operations. The Find Features function only recognizes features on imported brick solids or on brick solids created in Mastercam from stitching. To specify the size of fillet to detect. while maintaining the modified brick as a solid body at the top of the history tree. Only fillets whose radius falls within a specified range are detected. The Find Features dialog box opens. If you chose to create operations in step 4. choose Fillets. To fillet similar edges as one operation. Indicate the type of function to perform: To recreate detected fillets as operations. where possible: ¨ ¨ 7. 238 . To remove detected fillets from the solid body. Only holes whose radius falls within a specified range are detected. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. the Find Features function modifies the solid by removing features and adding operations to its history. Mastercam recognizes the contours of the face the hole cuts through. 2. To recreate each fillet as a separate operation. Finding. Next menu. and create constant-radius fillets on brick solids. then choose Done. Find features. The Find Features function will not recognize solid bodies with dirty. or suppressed operations. 1.

To remove detected holes from the solid body. ¨ ¨ Style: Select a line pattern from the drop-down list. or choose Color to select a color from the Color dialog box. If you chose to create operations in step 4. and this step is unnecessary. 2. Find features. accept or change the values in the Minimum Radius and Maximum Radius text boxes. select Combine operations. as follows: ¨ Offset: Type the value of the offset—the distance of the new geometry from the outermost point on the adjacent solid—you wish to use. you can change default attributes of new geometry created to reconstruct detected holes. Mastercam selects it automatically. choose Remove features. choose Holes. Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window. choose Create operations. ¨ Level: Type the number of the level that you want to assign. 6. ¨ ¨ Under Feature. Indicate the type of function to perform: To recreate detected holes as extrude cut operations. If you selected Holes in step 3 and Create Operations in step 4. To recreate each hole as a single-chain extrude cut operation. select Include blind holes. The Find Features dialog box opens. ¨ Color: Type the number of the color that you want to assign. indicate whether or not to combine operations. or choose Select to select a level using the Level dialog box. Width: Select a line thickness from the drop-down list. 239 . 3. ¨ 7. Choose New Geometry Attributes to change one or more attributes. then choose Done. clear Combine operations. where possible: ¨ To combine operations on multiple chains into one extrude cut operation. Solids. 8. Select one or more solids in the graphics window. 5.1. 4. clear Include blind holes. Choose Main Menu. To specify the size of hole to detect. ¨ To exclude blind holes and detect only thru holes. indicate whether or not to include blind holes: ¨ To detect blind holes (pass through solid in one direction only) as well as thru holes (pass completely through solid). If you chose to find holes in step 3. Next menu.

the Check Solid dialog box displays and lists up to ten errors. Choose Main Menu. 3. Choose Zoom to selected item to magnify the selected error in the graphics window. Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. If no errors are detected. This function is particularly useful for analyzing the integrity of imported solids and identifying entities that you may need to repair or reconstruct. If no errors are detected. The Solids Manager dialog box opens. This function identifies and describes specific errors and highlights their location in the solid drawing. Notes on managing error display When errors are listed in the Check Solid dialog box: ¨ ¨ Select a listed error to highlight its location in the graphics window. Checking solids from the Analyze Surfaces menu 1. Right-click on the selected solid. Choose Check Solid. Checking solid models for errors The Check Solid function analyzes solids for error conditions that may pose problems in solid modeling operations. with file formats in which healing during import is supported. Choose OK to perform the function. Or you may use the Remove Faces function to remove faces having problems identified by the Check Solid function in order to reconstruct new surfaces. which can be subsequently stitched using the From Surfaces function. 3. If errors are detected. Select a solid in the list. Analyze. For example. Solids. then choose Check Solid. the Check Solid dialog box displays and lists up to ten errors. 2. If errors are detected. you may want to reimport the file with this feature turned on. 4. On the Analyze Entity menu. make sure Edit is set to Y. Select a solid entity in the graphics window. Only. Choose Perform Check. or from the Solids Manager. a confirming message displays. the Check Solid dialog box redisplays and lists up to ten errors. Select a solid entity in the graphics window. 2. Checking solids from the Analyze Solid dialog box 1. The Analyze Solid dialog box displays. If no errors are detected. Choose Main Menu. a confirming message displays. Check Solid. 240 . Surfaces. Analyze. The Check Solid dialog box displays. 2. You can access the Check Solids function from the Analyze Surfaces menu. a confirming message displays.9. If errors are detected. Choose Main Menu. from the Analyze Solid dialog box. Checking solids from the Solids Manager 1. 3. Solids.

for the same solid or for different ones. B . make sure you select a new level for it (unless you want to replace an existing layout). Solid Drawing Layout Use the Solid Drawing Layout function to create a layout of different part views (for example. If you leave this box blank. side. edit this file. D .MC9 file in the MC9\TITLE BLOCKS sub-directory. To change the border design. each time you create a new layout.594 x 841 mm A0 . Scale factor You can have Mastercam automatically scale each view by the percentage you enter here.210 x 297 mm A3 . top. not 75%. You can use this function multiple times. The border design should be stored in the SHEETAS.5 x 11 in. to the layout. ¨ If ten errors are listed. 241 . Mastercam will just draw a plain solid line matching the paper dimensions.¨ Choose Unzoom to return the graphics window to the original display scale.22 x 34 in.297 x 420 mm A2 . so you can easily keep them separate from your original part.17 x 22 in. use .75. If you wish. Enter numbers as decimals: for example. Use a scale of less than 1 if all the drawings won't fit on the page size you have selected.8. front.34 x 44 in. C . E .420 x 594 mm A1 . Load border template Select this option to add a border design. Mastercam automatically places the new drawings on their own level. You can change this later from the Solid Drawing Layout menu.11 x 17 in. Choose any of the following to learn about the different dialog box options: Paper size Select any of the following paper sizes: English Metric A . you can change the scale later from the Solid Drawing Layout menu. Once you create the basic layout from this dialog box. you can customize it further. arranged within a standard page. and isometric). Suppress hidden lines Select this option if you do not want hidden lines to show. you can reset Maximum number of errors to a higher value (default is 10) and choose Perform Check see if there are more detectable errors.841 x 1189 mm You can also select Custom and type in your own dimensions. A4 . such as title blocks on the bottom or sides.

and Left views.Layout view selection Choose from four standard layouts: ¨ ¨ ¨ ¨ 4View DIN includes Bottom. you can select those as well. The value you type in here will be applied to each of the views. 4View ANSI includes Top. Left. clear Suppress hidden lines. 7. Front. and Right views. and Isometric views. Choose Main Menu. When you finish. Solids. Front. Type up to 4 numbered views (separated by commas) in the text box. 5. and Isometric views. Front. Enter a scaling factor for the different views. Layout. Indicate whether or not to display hidden lines in the solid drawing layout (you can change this setting later): ¨ ¨ If you do not want to see hidden lines. 3. 6. 242 . 3View ANSI includes Top. Choose from the following: 1 – Top 5 . Select a paper size. Choose a paper orientation: Portrait (tall) or Landscape (wide). You can change this setting later. 3View DIN includes Bottom. you will have multiple views of your part laid out within a standard size page. 2. The Solid Drawing Layout dialog box opens. To see hidden lines. Indicate whether or not to apply a page border. Front. Or choose User defined to create your own layout. select Suppress hidden lines. Note: The Solid Drawing Layout function works on only one solid at a time. Right. Creating a drawing layout Example Follow these steps to create a drawing layout. Choose a layout view format. 1. Next menu. 4.Right Side 2 – Front 6 – Left Side 3 – Back 7 – Isometric 4 – Bottom 8 – Axonometric If you have created any custom graphics views in this file.

choose Main Menu or Backup. The Levels dialog box opens. Level and select the layout level in the Levels dialog box. a plate with a pocket and four mounting holes: BEFORE 243 . Choose OK (or press [Enter] after each prompt area entry). Find the level that contains the part. instead of opening the Levels dialog box. To exit Solid Drawing Layout. You can use it to customize or enhance your drawing layout. Screen tab). Example: Creating a drawing layout Step-by-Step Choose the Before button to see the sample part. Screen. the layout is created. The Solid Drawing Layout menu appears in the menu area. (You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design tools. and click the red check mark next to it so that the level does not display. Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment. When you click on it. then choose All. If your drawing contains more than one solid. Mastercam prompts you to enter a level in the prompt area. Choose OK.) Tip: To hide your original part. a name. choose Level. 12. This menu will be active until you choose Main Menu or Backup. Note: If Enter level in prompt area is selected in your screen configuration settings (choose Main Menu. or press [Esc]. if desired. Configure. Note: All of the entities in the drawing layout will be placed on this level.8. 11. you are prompted to choose one. 10. Type a level number and. You can also press [Alt+E] to display the Hide menu. 9. Make sure you select a level that doesn’t already contain part information or geometry (any entities on the level will be deleted). you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout.

After Customizing the drawing layout Immediately after you create a drawing layout. and the Gview automatically changes to Top. While this menu is active. you can still use the toolbar or the Secondary Menu to access other Mastercam functions. you can return to this menu by choosing Backup until it reappears. you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit the current drawing layout. you will create a new drawing layout. while this menu is active will cause you to exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment. You can see the original part in the lower corner. the Solid Drawing Layout menu displays.Choose the After button to see the drawing layout produced by the Solid Drawing Layout function. (If you choose the Solid Drawing Layout function again. Choosing Backup or Main Menu. If another Mastercam function displays a different menu. This menu gives you options for customizing a layout drawing.) 244 . Click here to see the settings that were used in the Solid Drawing Layout dialog box. or pressing [Esc]. and all Solid Drawing Layout menu commands will apply to it. Once you exit. The lower-left corner of the paper boundary is automatically placed at X0Y0.

You may. other Solid Drawing Layout menu functions will apply only to the new drawing layout and not to a previous one.) Changing the hidden lines display Choosing the Hidden Lines option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you fine-tune how hidden lines are displayed on your drawing layout. Add/Remove : Creates and adds defined. using the same setting as the current layout. Rotation is measured counter clockwise. you can return to this menu by choosing Backup until it reappears. or pressing [Esc]. where you can recreate the drawing layout. place the new layout on a different level. Once you exit. the Solid Drawing Layout menu displays. or removes a view. If another Mastercam function displays a different menu. While this menu is active. you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit the current drawing layout. or detail by an angle you specify. you will create a new drawing layout. using current or new settings. however. Rotate : Rotates the selected view. section. Note: After you use this command. 245 . Chg view : Changes the orientation of a view (for example. Front to Side). Reset : Opens the Solid Drawing Layout dialog box. Customizing the drawing layout Immediately after you create a drawing layout. you can still use the toolbar or the Secondary Menu to access other Mastercam functions. or cross-section views. Allign : Aligns a view along a vertical or horizontal axis.Solid : Creates a new drawing layout for a different solid. while this menu is active will cause you to exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment. custom detail. Scale : Changes the scale of one or more views. (If you choose the Solid Drawing Layout function again. Pan : Moves a view from one point to another. where you can change how hidden lines are displayed for one or more of the views. Paper Size : Changes the paper size. Hidden Lines : Displays the Hidden Lines menu. This menu gives you options for customizing a layout drawing. Choosing Backup or Main Menu. and all Solid Drawing Layout menu commands will apply to it.

(You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design tools. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. 2. Choose one of the Hidden Line options: ¨ Choose One view to toggle the hidden lines display for a single view. 1. choose Scale. Specify a scaling option: 246 . If you typed Custom. or choose Main Menu to exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment completely.) Changing the paper size Choosing the Paper Size option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you select a new paper size for the drawing layout. Choose Hide all or Show all to hide or show all hidden lines for all of the drawings in the layout. 2.1. In the prompt area. or choose Main Menu to exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment completely. press [Enter] after each entry. 1. Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment. type the letter code for the desired paper size or type Custom to enter your own dimensions. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. (You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design tools. The new page will still have its lower-left corner at X0Y0. choose Hidden lines. Then press [Enter]. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. ¨ ¨ Choose Toggle all to reverse the settings for all of the drawings. 3. The Scale menu displays. 2. 3. Choose Backup or press [Esc] to return to the Solid Drawing Layout menu. choose Paper size. Choose Backup or press [Esc] to return to the Solid Drawing Layout menu. You will be prompted to select a view in the graphics window. you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout. The individual views will be redistributed evenly in the new page. The Hidden Lines menu displays. you will be prompted to enter an X and Y dimension. you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout. Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment.) Changing the scale Choosing the Scale option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you select a different scale for one or more views in the drawing layout.

Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment.) Moving a view Choosing the Pan option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you drag a single view to a new location. 4. Changing the orientation of a view Choosing the Chg View option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you change the orientation of one of the views. (You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design tools. type the number of the new view and press [Enter]. either horizontally or vertically. if you change the scale once to . Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment. Note: The scale amount is always relative to the original size. In the prompt area. 247 . Use the same Gview numbers as for custom layout selection. Choose Backup or press [Esc] to return to the Solid Drawing Layout menu. and then change it again and enter 1. 3. use . ¨ ¨ Use the Pan feature to move a single drawing to a desired point.75. choose Chg view. When prompted. click on any point in the desired view. you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout. 3. Note: This command also works on cross-sections and detail views. Use the Align feature to align the drawings with each other. you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout.¨ Choose Scale one to change the scale for a single view. For example. not 75%. Select one of the views by clicking on any of its points or entities.75. and the entire view will move with it.) The scaled views are positioned at the center point of the original views. or choose Main Menu to exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment completely. or choose Main Menu to exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment completely. Enter a scale amount in the prompt area and press [Enter]. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. 2. 4. ¨ Choose Scale all to change the scale for all the views. Enter numbers as decimals: for example. You need to select one point in a view. (You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design tools. the drawings will go back to their original size. Choose Backup or press [Esc] to return to the Solid Drawing Layout menu. 1.

2. Click anywhere on the desired view to select it.1. or use the Point Entry menu to access additional point selection options. Note: This command also works on cross-section and detail views. Use the Point Entry menu to choose a point. On any view. Choose Backup or press [Esc] to return to the Solid Drawing Layout menu. Aligning views Choosing the Align option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you line up a view along a vertical or horizontal axis. 4. 248 . Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment. anywhere in the graphics window. The Point Entry menu displays. 3. Use the Pan or Align features to re-position the rotated drawing in line with the others. or choose Main Menu to exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment completely. 4. Use the mouse to sketch a point. 1. choose Align. Mastercam displays intersecting horizontal and vertical axes that indicate where the selected views will line up. choose Pan. you may use the mouse to sketch a point. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. or use the Point Entry menu to access additional point selection options. You can choose this point in two ways: ¨ ¨ Drag the mouse to a new point anywhere in the graphics window. and click at the desired point. the rotation will be measured counter-clockwise. Choose a destination point. Enter a rotation angle in the prompt area and press [Enter]. Use positive numbers only. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. Select a reference point. 3. 1. 2. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu.) Rotating a view Choosing the Rotate option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you rotate a view around its center point. you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout. Note: In this step and the next. (You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design tools. select a reference point to move from. 2. The Point Entry menu displays. The reference point you selected in step 2 will move here. choose Rotate.

you are no longer limited to four views. 4. You can add any or all of the following views: ¨ ¨ ¨ Currently defined graphics views Cross-section views of various orientations Detail views When you use this menu option. You can define a cross-section based on a straight horizontal or vertical line through any point in the part. Click on the menu and topics below for more information. choose the point that you want to align to one of the axes. On any view outside the selected reference point. 249 . or choose Main Menu to exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment completely. or detail drawing.3. the Add/Remove menu displays. Choose Backup or press [Esc] to return to the Solid Drawing Layout menu. cross-section. or a 3D plane. Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment. When you choose Add/Remove. Add Details : Creates detail drawings that zoom in on small sections of a part. you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout. a zigzag cross-section.) Resetting a drawing layout Choosing the Reset option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu displays the original Solid Drawing Layout dialog box and lets you replace the current drawing layout with a new one based on the selections you make. Mastercam is smart enough to figure out whether it should align the view to the horizontal or vertical axis. You can add as many new elements as you wish. Adding and removing views Choosing the Add/Remove option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you create and add new views to your layout or remove existing views from your layout. (You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design tools. Add View : Adds a currently defined graphics view to the drawing layout. Remove : Removes an entire view. Add Section : Adds a cross-section view to the drawing layout.

The Detail Type dialog box opens. Click anywhere on a view to remove it completely. Add Detail. Use it to delete any of the original views or a view. Select a color and scale factor for the new view and choose OK. 3. 250 .Adding defined views Use the Add View option to add a currently defined graphics view to the drawing layout. 1. 3. 4. 1. Choose OK when prompted to confirm the selection. The Point Entry menu displays. Remove. Add View. Note: The point you select will be the center of the new view. Important: You cannot use Mastercam’s Undo function to reverse this operation. choose Add/Remove. Removing views Use the Remove option to delete all of the entities associated with a particular view. you can use the Pan or Align features to fine-tune the layout. 2. choose Add/Remove. In the prompt area. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. type the number of the new view and press [Enter]. ¨ ¨ 3. Select the location for the new view. Note: Use the same Gview numbers as the custom layout selection. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. Once you have added the new view. The Parameters dialog box opens. Creating and adding detail views Example Use the Add Detail option to zoom in on a section of a view and add a detail drawing to the layout. section or detail that has been added. Select the type of detail view to create: Circle Rectangle Choose OK. 5. 2. or use the Point Entry menu to access additional point selection options. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. You may use the mouse to sketch a point. choose Add/Remove. 1. 2.

Select the location for the new view. 6. Select a color and scale factor for the section view and choose OK. which became the center of the detail area. You may use the mouse to sketch a point. or use the Point Entry menu to access additional point selection options. The example uses a scale of 2X. Example: Adding a detail view Step-by-Step Choose the Before button to see part of a sample drawing layout. The Point Entry menu displays 7. The Parameters dialog box opens. Drag the mouse to define the zoom area and click when you are done. the point you select will be the center of the detail drawing. and a different color for clarity’s sake. The selected point is on the rim of the bolt hole. the point will be one of the corners.4. 251 . 5. Select the point you want to zoom in on. Note: For a Circle detail. 8. You may use the mouse to sketch a point. Note: The point you select will be the center of the new view. Use the Pan or Align features to fine-tune the layout. or use the Point Entry menu to access additional point selection options. For a Rectangle detail.. or use the Point Entry menu to choose a boundary point. This example shows a Circle detail. The focus of the detail is the bolt hole indicated by the white circle: BEFORE Choose the After button to see the detail view created by the Solid Drawing Layout function.

The Section Type dialog box opens. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu. Select an orientation for your cross-section: Straight cross-sections ¨ Horizontal The section is based on a horizontal line through the part at a point you select. 2. 1. ¨ 2 points You are prompted to select two points on a view. choose Add/Remove. Add Section.AFTER Creating and adding section views Examples Use the Add Section option to define a cross-section view and add a drawing of it to your layout. ¨ Vertical The section is based on a vertical line through the part at a point you select. 252 . the cross-section is based on the line through these points.

unlike other cross-section methods.75. Select a color (Use this option to choose a color that will apply to just this operation. use the mouse to sketch a point. Note that. 253 . Choose OK. as prompted. or use the Point Entry menu to access additional point selection options. Select the location for the new view. the second indicates where it ends. 7. the Point Entry or Define Plane menu displays. You may use the mouse to sketch a point. The first point of the pair indicates where a segment begins. 4. Use a scale of less than 1 if all the drawings won't fit on the page size you have selected. Note: The point you select will be the center of the new view. You can have as many segments as you wish. or use the Point Entry menu to access additional point selection options. Example: Adding a cross-section view Step-by-Step Choose the Before button to see a sample drawing layout. 3. Note: To select a point. Each pair of points defines a vertical segment of a cross-section. Depending on your selection in step 2. ¨ Vertical You will be prompted to select several pairs of points. The white circle shows the point that will be the basis for the cross-section. The first point of the pair indicates where a segment begins. as prompted. for the section view and choose OK. The Parameters dialog box opens. ¨ 3D Plane You are prompted to define a cross-section plane. the second indicates where it ends. Mastercam automatically draws the connecting lines for you. Mastercam automatically draws the connecting lines for you. use . use the Define Plane menu and enter additional information or points. not 75%) If you wish. To select a plane. You can have as many segments as you wish. you can change the scale later from the Solid Drawing Layout menu. the plane is set with respect to the solid itself rather than the graphics window. The Point Entry menu displays. Use the Pan or Align features to fine-tune the layout. Enter numbers as decimals: for example.. Each pair of points defines a horizontal segment of a cross-section. 6. Select the point (or points) or plane where you want the section to divide the part. The color will apply to all entities created as a result of this operation) and scale factor ( You can have Mastercam automatically scale each view by the percentage you enter here. 5. using the Define Plane menu and entering additional information or points.Zigzag cross-sections ¨ Horizontal You will be prompted to select several pairs of points.

In addition.Choose the After button to see the cross-section view that has been added. A Horizontal line cross-section was selected. based on the point shown above. the Align feature was used to line it up with the other views. a corresponding line appears in the Side view at lower right. After adding the section view. You can see on the Top view where Mastercam drew an extra line to indicate the precise location and orientation of the section. 254 . a different color was specified.

then drops down to the lower-right bolt hole.Example: Adding a zigzag cross-section view Step-by-Step Choose the Before button to see a sample drawing layout. then drops down to cut through one of the bolt holes. Choose the After button to see the cross-section view that has been added. 255 . the Align feature was used to line it up with the other views. It continues to near the "X". This example shows how to create a crosssection that cuts through the boss and pocket on the upper-left of the part. In the Top view. After adding the section view. Mastercam automatically draws a bounding box around the cross-section. Mastercam adds the lines showing the precise location of the cross section. The left-most white circle shows the start of the first segment.

256 . This example replaces the side view on the lower right with a cross-section through the boss and pocket. in this example.25. Choose the Before button to see a sample drawing layout.Example: Adding a 3D-Plane cross-section view Step-by-Step This example shows a cross-section created by defining a plane. which cuts the cross-section through the YZ plane at whatever X value is specified. X=1. which is about where the starting point is in the Before drawing. The cross-section is based on an X=const plane. Choose the Step 1 button to see the cross-section view that has been created. The white circle shows the approximate starting point of the cross-section.

the Align feature is used to line it up with the front view. Finally. then the Pan command is used to move the new section view to that location. 257 .Choose the After button to see how the original side view is replaced by the new cross-section. The Remove command is used to delete the lower-right view.

You're Reading a Free Preview

Descarga
scribd
/*********** DO NOT ALTER ANYTHING BELOW THIS LINE ! ************/ var s_code=s.t();if(s_code)document.write(s_code)//-->